Home

Partlow MRC9000 VersaChart circular chart recorder user manual

1. mm vU Uuc Uv TU cCcccccucc DUVUDIDIDIA DVD DV O U U U UC UTU zorr U UU UC U U INPUT 1 3 5 7 INPUT 2 4 6 8 JU2 JUS JU6 JU8 c N c c NARROW TC WIDE RTD mA 25 mV 100 mV 1 VOLT P 10 VOLT uU U U U U U U U O U U U UC UU vvv u v VE uU U U U UU UD O U U U UVC UU 9 70 0 0 v VE CODE D DOWN L LEFT M MIDDLE PARKED R RIGHT U F FITTED FIGURE 11 1 JU15 JU16 e RED JU7 JU1 JU4 Jue JU8 JU11 02 JU5 0012 e e e e e There are up to an additional 2 jumpers per Input Board that are used for BOARD ID Location Board 1 is the bottom board determines the position of JU13 and or JU14 Section 11 11 3 Edition 3 Rev G FOR INPUTS 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8 BOARD POSITION JU13 JU14 L 24 Board 4 amp VIEW 3 C Board 1 4 When installing an Input Board for any reason check the location where this board is mounted then verify the position of JU13 and or JU14 TC WIDE or TC NARROW were selected go to Step 5 if not go to Step 6 NC Depress the and the upper display line will show IVx CAL CJC OR TC and the lower display line will show TC or CJC Select TC by depressing the then the until TC is blinking then depress the ENTER NC Depress the and the upper display line will show IVx PERFORM CAL and the lower display line wi
2. 4 Press the to advance to the next parameter PROFILE CONTROL Only on Profiles PROFILE CONTROL Only on Profilers Selections DISABLED ENABLED Press the 2a change then to desired choice then press the Edition 3 9 2 Section 9 Rev G 5 Press the to advance to the next parameter ALARM SETTINGS ALARM SETTINGS DISABLED ENABLED desired choice then press the ENTER 6 Press the to advance to the next parameter TUNING PARAMETERS only seen if CONTROLLER TUNING PARAMETERS Press the 2a change then 10 desired choice then press the e Selections DISABLED ENABLED 7 Press the to advance to the next parameter SETPOINT CHANGES only seen if CONTROLLER SETPOINT CHANGES Press the 2a change then 10 Selections DISABLED ENABLED desired choice then press the Section 9 9 3 Edition 3 Rev G 8 Press the to advance to the next parameter CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION Press the 2a change then to desired choice then press the ewer ENTER Selections DISABLED ENABLED 9 Press the to advance to the next parameter DERIVED ACTUATORS DERIVED ACTUATORS Press the 2a change then to Selections DISABLED ENABLED desired choice then press the f ENTER 10 Press the to advance to the next parameter OPERATOR INPUTS CONFIGURATION OPERATOR INPUTS CONF Press the a change then 10 Selections DI
3. Edition 3 3 30 Section 3 Rev Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration INSTRUMENT SETTINGS Parameter INSTRUMENT TAG DISPLAY OPTION INSTR ONACTUATOR ALARMING ON ACTUATOR CONTROL ON ACTUATOR DATE DISPLAY FORMAT TIME DISPLAY FORMAT CURRENT DATE CURRENT DAY CURRENT TIME TIME TO LOG DATA COMMUNICATIONS MODE COMMS ADDRESS COMMS BIT RATE COMMS PARITY INPUT SCAN SEQUENCE Section 3 3 31 3 Rev G Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration DERIVED ACTUATORS Derived Actuator Equation Edition 3 3 32 Section 3 Rev Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration OPERATOR INPUTS Parameter PROMPT TEXT OFF NO 0 CHOICE ON YESA CHOICE ACTUATION STYLE Continuous Momentary Continuous Momentary Continuous _ Momentary POWER UP STATE On WHEN DISPLAYED Parameter PROMPT TEXT OFF NO 0 CHOICE ON YES 1 CHOICE ACTUATION STYLE Continuous Momentary Continuous Momentary Continuous Momentary POWER UP STATE On WHEN DISPLAYED Parameter PROMPT TEXT OFF NO 0 CHOICE ON YESA CHOICE ACTUATION STYLE Continuous Momentary Continuous Momentary Continuous _ Momentary POWER UP STATE m On WHEN DISPLAYED Parameter PROMPT TEXT OFF NO 0 CHOICE ON YES 1 CHOICE ACT
4. D R V 3 V A R L S 5 Press el to advance to the next parameter INPUT X if it applies DVxx INPUT X NONE USED Press the ea change then Or Selections NONE USED as required to pick desired choice IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4 V5 IV6 IV7 IV8 PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4 DV1 DV2 DV3 then press the DV4 DV5 DV7 DV8 DV9 DV10 DVi DV12 Additional selections for use with controller option CV1 CV2 CV4 SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12 TOTAL1 TOTAL2 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22 TOTAL3 TOTAL4 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32 SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4 OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42 Edition 3 4 20 Section 4 RevG 6 Press ine to advance to the next parameter INPUT X if it applies DVxx INPUT X NONE USED Press the a change then or Selections NONE USED as required to pick desired choice V1 IV2 IV8 IV4 IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8 PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4 DV1 DV2 DV3 then press vm DV4 DV5 DV6 DV7 DV8 DV9 DV10 DVi DV12 Additional selections for use with controller option CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4 SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12 TOTAL1 TOTAL2 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22 TOTAL3 TOTAL4 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32 SV1 SV2 SV4 OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42 D 3 R V R L S 7 Press ine to advance to the next parameter INPUT X if it applies DVxx INPUT X NONE USED Press the change then or
5. Section 4 4 5 Edition 3 Rev G 02 8 If INPUT TYPE RANGE selected was mA mV or VOLT press the advance to the next parameter INPUT RANGE HIGH Units correspond to units IVx INPUT RANGE HIGH configured in INPUT TYPE RANGE mA mV 100 000 units or VOLT Press the a change then B Selections Bii ae 999 press 9 If INPUT TYPE RANGE selected was PULSE press the to advance to the next parameter PULSE RATE HIGH Not Yet Available IVx PULSE RATE HIGH 1000 PULSES SEC Press change then a to desired value then press the Selections 30 to 99999 10 If INPUT TYPE RANGE selected was COMMS press the to advance to the next parameter COMMS ADDRESS IVx COMMS ADDRESS Press ved change then to Selections desired address then press the e 1 to 247 ENTER Edition 3 4 6 Section 4 RevG 11 If INPUT TYPE RANGE selected was COMMS press the to advance to the next parameter COMMS REGISTER IVx COMMS REGISTER Press the ac change then B then then Press a 12 If INPUT TYPE RANGE selected was COMMS press the to advance to the next parameter REGIS Selections 0 to 65535 02 TER IVx REGISTER TYPE INT Press change then to desired choice then press the Selections INT LONG FLOA 13 If INPUT TYPE RANGE selected was mA mV or Volt press the to advance to the next
6. LINE 1 TEXT CONTROLLER 1 Iu Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text for instructions Edition 3 13 26 Section 13 Rev G 13 Press the to advance to the next parameter F3 OFF STATE TEXT only seen if KEY USAGE selected was CUSTOM CAx F3 OFF STATE TXT SP1 Selections TEXT Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text for instructions 14 Press the to advance to the next parameter F3 ON STATE TEXT only seen if KEY USAGE selected was CUSTOM CAx F3 ON STATE TEXT 5 2 Selections TEXT Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text for instructions 15 Press the to advance to the next parameter F4 KEY USAGE CAx F4 KEY USAGE NOT USED Selections NOT USED a ONN Press the 2a change then n C3 AUTO MANUAL C4 AUTO MANUAL LOCAL REMOTE to desired choice then press ne SP1 SP2 CUSTOM Section 13 13 27 Edition 3 RevG 16 Press the 8 advance to the next parameter F4 LINE 1 TEXT only seen if F4 KEY USAGE selected is other than NOT USED F4 LINE 1 TEXT Selections TEXT Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text for instructions 17 Press the to advance to the next parameter F4 OFF STATE TEXT only seen if KEY USAGE selected was CUSTOM CAx F4 OFF STATE TXT Selections TEXT Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text for instructions 18 Press the to advance to the next parameter F4 ON STATE TEXT only seen if KEY USAGE selected was CUSTOM CAx F4 ONST
7. 0 P 3 R A T 0 R amp R T M 3 S S A G CMxx COPY INITIALIZE NO Press the a change then to desired choice then press the Section 4 4 93 Edition 3 Rev G Selections NO YES Choose YES if the parameters to be programmed are the same as another CHART MESSAGE already pro grammed If selection is NO proceed to step 3 If selection is YES CMxx COPY FROM CM 0 INITIALIZE Press the to change to the desired chart Chart Message to be copied from 0 FACTORY DEFAULT message to be copied from R T M 5 S A G S Edition 3 4 94 Section 4 Rev G 3 Press the to advance to the next parameter ACTUATOR CMxx ACTUATOR NONE OFF Selections NONE OFF E ON CONTINUOUS Press the to change then ANY ALARM ANY PROCESS ALARM as required to desired choice then 11 A12 A13 A14 A21 A22 A23 A24 A31 A32 A33 A34 A41 M2 M3 A44 INSTRUMENT ALARM press the CHART FULL OPINP 1 OPINP2 OPINP3 OPINP4 OPINP5 OPINP6 OPINP7 OPINP8 OPINP9 OPINP 10 OP INP 11 OP INP 12 CHART CHANGED CHART ROTATION TREND DATA COLLECT ALT CHART SPEED DA1 DA2 DA4 DA5 DA6 DA7 DA8 DA9 DA10 DA11 DA12 DA13 DA14 DA15 DA16 DA17 DA18 DA19 DA20 DA21 DA22 DA23 DA24 PRESET1 PRESET2 PRESET3 PRESET4 TOTALPO1 TOTAL PO2 TOTAL TOTAL PO4 TIME1 TIME DATE 1 TIME2 TIME DATE 2 TIME 1 TO TIME 2 TIME DATE 1 TO2 TIMER 1 TIMER 2 TIMER3 T
8. 11 3 PARAMETER DEFAULTS This routine will invoke all of the default program parameter values See Appendix C for the listing of default values Step 1 With PARAMETER DEFAULTS in the lower display line depress the and SET DEFAULTS will appear in the upper display line and NO in the lower display line Depress then select YES to set the defaults 11 4 CHART CALIBRATION Step 2 Step 1 With CHART CALIBRATION in the lower display line depress to enter the Chart Calibration The upper display line will display START CALIBRATION To perform the chart calibration depress and select YES then depress the Press any key to continue Step 2 The upper display line will display INNER RING CALIBRATE and the lower display line will display SCROLL TOGGLES RING The keys will function as follows Edition 3 11 6 Section 11 RevG Will place a dot on the inner or outer ring whichever is selected for calibration SCROLL Will select either the inner or outer ring UP Will move the selected inner or outer ring position to the left and print a dot in the new position without moving the chart DOWN Will move the selected inner or outer ring position to the right and print a dot in the new position without moving the chart RESET Will move the chart 30 steps while not printing any dots ESC Will exit with no change to the calibration values ENTER Will exit with the new values being stored Step 3 With INNER RING CALIBR
9. Ax3 HYSTERESIS Note Units correspond to Units configured in Process Variables 3 units Selections 999999 m v decimal position 0 Press change then to 9 9999 decimal position 4 desired value then press ENTER NOTE If RATE Alarm is selected Hysteresis equals RATE in units TIME BASE Section 4 4 41 Edition 3 Rev G 23 Press the advance to the next parameter ALARM 4 TYPE Ax4 ALARM TYPE OFF Selections for recorder only P R S S V A R L 3 S Edition 3 Rev OFF PROCESS HIGH PROCESS LOW Press rel El change then to desired choice then press ENTER Additional selections for use With controller option BAND WITHIN BAND OUTSIDE DEVIATION ABOVE DEVIATION BELOW CONTROL LOOP OPEN When CONTROL LOOP OPEN is selected for ALARM TYPE and NON PID is selected for CONTROL TYPE CONTROLLERS section of CONFIGURATION prompt LOOP ALARM TYPE will be displayed 24 Press the to advance to the next parameter ALARM 4 TIME BASE only seen if Ax4 TYPE is RATE Ax4 TIME BASE PER SEC Press ro change then Ol to desired choice then press Selections PERSEC PER MIN PERHOUR PER DAY 4 42 Section 4 25 Press the advance to the next parameter ALARM 4 SAMPLE PERIOD only seen if Ax4 TYPE is RATE Ax4 SAMPLE PERIOD 10 SECONDS Press 9 change then t
10. 5 CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3 A4F5 CAMF5 CASF1 5 2 CA5F3 CASF5 CA5F5 Section 13 Press the change then ea to desired choice then press the Edition 3 Rev G 19 Press the to advance to the next parameter SECOND SETPOINT SOURCE only if SECOND SP ACTUATOR is not NONE OFF NOTE Whatever value is selected as the source of the setpoint the decimal position and the units type follow what was configured in Process Variables Cx SECOND SP SOURCE NONE USED Selections NONE USED Press the a change then IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4 IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8 PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4 OR desired choice then press DV1 DV2 DV3 DV4 DV5 DV6 DV7 DV8 DV9 DV10 DV11 DV12 CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4 CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8 CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12 TOTAL1 TOTAL2 TOTAL3 TOTAL 4 SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12 OUTPUT21 OUTPUT 22 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT 32 OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT 42 SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4 20 Press the to advance to the next parameter REMOTE SETPOINT RATIO NOTE Ratio is applied to the remote setpoint source before it is used and Cx REMOTE SP R ATIO to the output of the first controller in cascade mode before it is used as the setpoint of the second controller Ratio is a multiplier applied to the 1 000 output Controller Output 1 Ratio Selections 001 to 999 000 Controller 2 Setpoint Press the a change then to desired number then press re Edition 3 13 14 Section 13 RevG 21 Press the to ad
11. Edition 3 Rev o JI m O JI O O mMm I v JI m O JI O O mI 11 Press the O advance to the next parameter SPAN 1 LOW Rx SPAN 1 LOW 0 units Press the am change then then to Selections 999999 desired number then press the decimal position 0 9 9999 decimal position 4 Units correspond to Units configured in corresponding Value to Record parameter previously selected 12 Press the advance to the next parameter SPAN 1 HIGH Rx SPAN 1 HIGH 100 units Selections Press the to change then then to 999999 decimal position 0 9 9999 desired number then press decimal position 4 Units correspond to Units configured in corresponding Value to Record parameter previously selected Edition 3 4 50 Section 4 Rev G 13 Press the advance to the next parameter SCALE 1 INTERVAL Rx SCALE 1 INTERVAL 10 DIVISIONS Press the 2a change then then to Selections 0 to 200 desired number then press m 0 NO SCALES 14 Press the advance to the next parameter ZONE 2 HIGH Rx ZONE 2 HIGH DIVISION 0 Press the a change then to Selections 0 to 200 desired number then press mm 0 SINGLE ZONE Section 4 4 51 Edition 3 Rev o JI m O JI O O mMm I 15 Press the advance to the next parameter SPAN 2 HIGH Only if Zone 2 HIGH 0 Rx SPAN 2 HIGH 0 units Press the a change then then to Selections 999999 desi
12. DISPLAY TAG FUNCTION INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT ACTUATOR RESET ACTUATOR DISPLAY UNITS UNITS DESCRIPTION DECIMAL POSITION VALUE FILTER seconds seconds seconds DISPLAY VALUE DISPLAY FILTER seconds seconds seconds Edition 3 3 22 Section 3 RevG Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration PROCESS VARIABLES Parameter DISPLAY TAG INPUT DISPLAY UNITS OTHER UNITS DECIMAL POSITION VALUE FILTER seconds seconds seconds DISPLAY OPTION DISPLAY FILTER seconds seconds seconds Ax1 ALARM TYPE Ax1 TIME BASE Ax1 SAMPLE PERIOD mun Ax1 HYSTERESIS Ax2 ALARM TYPE Ax2 TIME BASE Ax2 SAMPLE PERIOD mem od Ax2 HYSTERESIS Ax3 ALARM TYPE Ax3 TIME BASE Ax3 SAMPLE PERIOD eres Hrs Ax3 HYSTERESIS Ax4 ALARM TYPE Ax4 TIME BASE Ax4 SAMPLE PERIOD rcd Ax4 HYSTERESIS LOOP ALARM TIME ALARM INHIBIT Section 3 3 23 Edition 3 Rev G Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration CONTROLLERS Parameter CONTROLLER 1 CONTROLLER 2 CONTROLLER 3 CONTROLLER 4 CONTROL TYPE OUT 1 TYPE OUT 2 TYPE OUT 1 HYST OUT 2 HYST OUT 1 LIMIT 2 OUT 2 LIMIT OUT 1 ERROR OUT 2 ERROR OUT SLEW RATE MIN MIN MIN MANUAL ACTUATOR AUTO TRANSFER ON ON ON MAIN SP SOURCE REMOTE
13. RELAY 7 RELAY 8 CA4F4 CA4F5 T ie L Z 3 R S Edition 3 4 60 Section 4 Rev G 15 Press ine to advance to the next parameter HOLD ACTUATOR Section 4 Tx HOLD ACTUATOR NONE OFF Selections NONE OFF ON CONTINUOUS ANY ALARM ANY PROCESS ALARM A11 A12 A13 A14 A21 A22 A23 A24 A31 A32 A33 A34 M1 M2 M3 M4 INSTRUMENT ALARM CHART FULL OPINP1 OPINP2 OPINP3 OPINP 4 INP5 OPINP6 OP INP7 OPINP8 OPINP9 OPINP 10 OPINP 11 OP INP 12 CHART CHANGED CHART ROTATION TREND DATA COLLECT ALT CHART SPEED DA1 DA2 DA3 DA4 DA5 DA6 DA7 DA8 DA9 DA10 DA11 DA12 DA13 DA14 DA15 DA16 DA17 DA18 DA19 DA20 DA 1 DA22 DA23 DA24 PRESET1 PRESET2 PRESET3 PRESET 4 TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2 TOTAL TOTAL PO4 TIME 1 TIME DATE 1 TIME2 TIME DATE 2 TIME 1 TO TIME 2 TIME DATE 1 TO 2 TIMER1 TIMER2 TIMER3 TIMER4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 COMM TRIGGER 1 COMM TRIGGER 2 COMM TRIGGER 3 COMM TRIGGER 4 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 RESET MOD ENTER ON THE HOUR DAY OF WEEK DAY OF MONTH RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 RELAY 5 RELAY 6 RELAY 7 RELAY 8 Press the to change then as required to desired choice then press the ENTER Additional selections for use with controller option OU TPUT 11 OUTPUT12 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32 OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42 CAIF1 CAIF2 CAIF3 CAIF4 CAIF5 CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3 CA2F4 CA2F5 CA3F1 CA3F2 4 5 CA4F1 CA4F2 CMF3 CA4
14. Remove the pen cartridge assembly from its shipping container With mounting tab on the bottom slide the pen cartridge assembly item 2 on Figure 1 1 into the print actuator item 1 on Figure 1 1 FIGURE 1 1 PLASTIC CHART SHIELD DO NOT REMOVE PRINT ACTUATOR TRAVERSE CABLE PRINT ACTUATOR 1 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 S E E32 Edition 3 1 2 Section 1 Rev G 1 3 ORDER MATRIX MODEL NUMBER 0 i CASE TYPE amp MOUNTING TYPE 1 Recorder Only 1 NEMAS Panel Mount 2 Controller 2 NEMAA Panel Mount 3 Profiler ENCLOSURE OPTIONS PENS 1 Glass Window 1 One Trend Pen One Color 2 Glass Window amp Door Lock 2 Two Trend Pens Two Colors 3 Plastic Window 3 Three Trend Pens Three Colors 4 Plastic Window amp Door Lock 4 Four Trend Pens Four Colors 5 One Trend Pen Four Colors MEMORY CARD COMMS 6 Two Trend Pens Four Colors 0 None 7 Three Trend Pens Four Colors 1 RS 485 232 Comms UNIVERSAL INPUTS MATH TOTALIZER 1 One Input 0 None 2 Two Inputs 1 Math 3 Three Inputs 2 Totalizer 4 Four Inputs 3 Math amp Totalizer 6 Six Inputs 8 Eight Inputs TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY 0 None DIGITAL INPUTS 1 One Trans Power Supply 0 None 2 Two Trans Power Supply 3 Three Trans Power Supply RELAY OUTPUTS SPDT 4 Four Trans Power Supply 0 None 2 Two Relays 4 20mA OUTP
15. and NO appears in the lower display line Depress the select YES then to start the test ENTER Step 2 LED TEST PROCEDURE will appear in the upper display line and PRESS ENTER TO START will appear in the lower display line Depress and PRESS ENTER TO INDEX appears in the lower display line ENTER Bos E ENTER Depress and LED 1 should light With each successive depression of the LEDs turn ON then OFF in order 1 through 8 then all ON then all OFF is depressed again the sequence begins again Step 4 E To exit the test depress the and the instrument will return to the normal display Section 10 10 3 Edition 3 Rev 10 5 CHART DEMONSTRATION Allows the user to demonstrate the chart capabilites CAUTION When this TEST is intiated any parameter values previously programmed will be replaced with the demonstration values Step 1 With CHART DEMONSTRATION in the lower display line depress the INITIATE CHART DEMO appears in the upper display line and NO appears in the lower display line Step 2 Depress select YES depress Instrument returns to Normal Display ENTER Step 3 Depress CHANGE CHART appears in the upper display line select YES select YES again for START NEW CHART Step 4 Chart demo begins Step 5 To exit or quit demo depress to CHART ROTATION and select OFF 10 6 mA OUTPUT TEST Allows the operator to verify that the current output s is are functioni
16. 2 12 53 85 17 04 12 60 432 82mm 320 04mm ees 2 044 58 93 _ 5 24 133 10 7 747 5 6 196 77 EC1 EC2 EC3 EC4 M a 1260 A 320 04mm 14 12 358 65mm Edition 3 2 2 Section 2 Rev 2 2 PREPARATION FOR WIRING This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 89 336EEC on the approxi mation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility The factory cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non recommended modification of this product Electrical noise is a phenomenon typical of industrial environments The following are guidelines that must be followed to minimize the effect of noise upon any instrumentation Installation Considerations Listed below are some of the common sources of electrical noise in the industrial environment Ignition Transformers Arc Welders Mechanical contact relay s Solenoids Before using any instrument near the devices listed the instructions below should be followed 1 If the instrument is to be mounted in the same panel as any of the listed devices separate them by the largest distance possible For maximum electrical noise reduction the noise generating devices should be mounted in a separate enclosure 2 f possible eliminate mechanical contact r
17. 250 0 0 66 0 42 0 62 1 71 0 03 0 101 0 300 0 09 0 19 0 29 0 57 0 03 0 014 250 0 0 17 0 42 0 62 1 21 0 03 0 025 0 1300 0 68 0 21 0 42 1 32 0 13 0 104 250 0 1 44 0 60 0 93 2 97 0 03 0 220 0 600 0 18 0 11 0 44 0 73 0 06 0 028 200 0 0 31 0 20 0 81 1 32 0 02 0 048 250 200 0 93 0 60 2 15 3 68 0 01 0 142 TO ACHIEVE STATED RESULTS THE FOLLOWING THERMOCOUPLES MUST BE USED WITH THE TC NARROW INPUT TYPE G T C 1800 2300 1 59 0 54 0 79 2 92 0 05 0 243 800 1800 1 23 0 43 0 64 2 30 0 10 0 188 500 800 1 38 0 25 0 70 2 33 0 03 0 210 300 500 1 79 0 25 0 87 2 91 0 02 0 274 0 300 3 65 0 58 1 61 5 84 0 03 0 557 1800 2300 2 14 0 54 1 01 3 68 0 05 0 326 1200 1800 1 62 0 43 0 80 2 85 0 06 0 247 300 1200 1 33 0 28 0 68 2 29 0 09 0 202 0 300 1 54 0 12 0 77 2 43 0 03 0 235 1800 2300 1 88 0 38 0 90 3 26 0 05 0 287 300 1800 1 32 0 40 0 68 2 40 0 15 0 201 0 300 1 75 0 26 0 85 2 86 0 03 0 267 450 1370 0 44 1 10 0 09 0 067 0 450 0 56 1 06 0 05 0 085 1000 1400 0 72 1 44 0 04 0 110 500 1000 0 59 1 17 0 05 0 089 0 500 0 62 1 12 0 05 0 095 Appendix E E 1 Edition 3 Rev G THE FOLLOWING THERMOCOUPLES ARE AVAILABLE AS NARROW ONLY See Note 01 2 3 4 5 6 INPUT RANGE REF LIN DEVIATION RESOL CAL ACC Y C bit 04 0 018 TT C 0 0 02 0 036 250 220 0 00 0 111 800 1700 0 09 0 065 200 800 90 0 06 0 088 250 1750 1 0 15 0 086 200 1800 0 16 0 113 See Note 1 2 3 4 5 6 INPUT RANGE FACTO
18. A11 A12 A13 A14 A21 A22 A23 A24 A31 A32 A33 A34 M1 M2 M3 Add INSTRUMENT ALARM press Me i CHART FULL OPINP1 OPINP2 OPINP3 OPINP4 OPINP5 OPINP6 OPINP7 OPINP8 OPINP9 OPINP 10 OPINP 11 OP INP 12 CHART CHANGED CHART ROTATION TREND DATA COLLECT ALT CHART SPEED DA1 DA2 DA3 DA4 DA5 DA6 DA7 DA8 DA9 DA10 DAT DA12 DA13 DA14 DA15 DA16 DA17 DA18 DA19 DA20 DA 1 DA22 DA23 DA24 PRESET1 PRESET2 PRESET3 PRESET 4 TOTAL TOTAL PO2 TOTAL TOTAL PO4 TIME 1 TIME DATE 1 TIME 2 TIME DATE 2 TIME 1 TO TIME 2 TIME DATE 1 TO2 TIMER TIMER 2 TIMER 3 TIMER 4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 COMM TRIGGER 1 Additional selections for use with controller option COMM TRIGGER 2 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12 COMM TRIGGER 3 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22 COMM TRIGGER 4 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42 RESET MOD ENTER CA1F1 CA1F2 ON THE HOUR CA1F4 DAY OF WEEK CA2F1 CA2F2 DAY OF MONTH CA2F4 RELAY 1 RELAY 2 CA3F1 2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 RELAY 5 RELAY 6 CA4F1 4 2 RELAY 7 RELAY 8 CA4F4 D 3 R V R L S Section 4 4 23 Edition 3 Rev G 10 Press MC to advance to the next parameter RESET ACTUATOR Only seen if a reset actuator is required per the FUNCTION specified D R V 3 D V R L S Edition 3 Rev G DVxx RESET ACTUATOR NONE OFF Press the change then or as required to pick desired choice Selections NON
19. CURRENT DATE WDO UY DD MM YY format 01 01 95 DD MMM YY Press the 2a change then as required to desired choice then press Change and enter each portion of the date Edition 3 4 78 Section 4 Rev G Enter Current Date 9 Press the to advance to the next parameter CURRENT DAY 10 Press the to advance to the next parameter CURRENT TIME Press the a change then Enter Current Time as required to desired choice then press the em N S T SUN b WED Press the a change then THUR FRI SAT to desired choice then press the M ENTER T CURRENT TIME cormat format 24 HOUR T T G S CURRENT DAY Change and enter each portion of the date 11 Press the to advance to the next parameter TIME TO LOG DATA NOT AVAILABE AT THIS TIME Format AM PM 24 HOUR Section 4 TIME TO LOG DATA format 11 59 PM Press the ea change then as required to desired choice then press 4 79 3 Selections AM PM N S R U M S G S 12 Press the to advance to the next parameter COMMUNICATIONS MODE Only seen if the communi cations option is present COMMUNICATIONS MODE SLAVE Press the 2a change then to desired choice then press the fewer NOTE When Master is selected the recorder uses the comms address that was previously programmed No slav
20. Configuration LEDs Page 4 65 Parameter that selects an actuator which when true causes the specified LED 1 8 to be lit LEDS System Prompts Configuration Page 4 64 Prompts section that configures actuators for the LEDs LOW FLOW CUTOFF System Prompts Configuration Totalizers Page 4 57 Parameter that specifies the value below which the flow will not be added to the total If the flow rate is negative the flow will be subtracted if the value is more negative than the magnitude of the LOW FLOW CUTOFF value specified If negative flow totalization subtraction is not desired the negative flow rate must be cutoff at the input using CUTOFF TYPE and CUTOFF VALUE For example if LOW FLOW CUTOFF is 100 GAL HR positive flow of 0 to 99 GAL HR will not be totalized but negative flow of 101 or more negative would be totalized sub tracted Major time lines Major time lines are printed as a series of dots with noticeable spacing and extend from the inner chart ring to the outer chart ring The number of major time lines printed on the chart is determined by the MAJOR TIME PERIODS parameter in the Chart Configuration The color of the major time lines is programmable MAJOR TIME PERIODS Chart Prompts Chart Configuration Page 6 4 Parameter that specifies the number of periods or sections the chart shall be divided into This also corresponds to the number of major time lines printed and indirectly the time between
21. Parameter that specifies the DIVISION or ring corresponding to the top end of the second zone Setting it to zero specifies that only one zone is being used ZONE 1 HIGH specifies the bottom of zone 2 if two zones are used Appendix C C 15 Edition 3 Rev G Appendix Examples EXAMPLE 1 Application Palmer Bowlus Flume Height Flow Given Transmitter output linear in distance 4mA 0 0 20mA 2 85 Configuration Inputs As required Custom Curves See below Derived Variables See below Process Variables if alarming required As required Recorders See below Totalizers if Totals required As required Instrument Settings As required LEDs Relays As required Chart As required Custom Curves Custom Curves Number 1 1 Decimal Position of Input 2 CC1 Decimal Position of Output 2 CC1 Number of Points 20 CC1 Point Pair 1 0 00 gt 0 00 Point Pair 2 0 15 gt 0 30 CC1 Point Pair 3 0 30 gt 1 00 CC1 Point Pair 20 2 85 gt 50 20 Derived Variables DV Number 1 DV1 Display Tag GPM DV1 Function DV1 Input DV1 Display Units Custom Curve 1 IV1 Input configured Other DV1 Units Description CPM DV1 Decimal Position 2 Recorders Recorder Number 1 R1 Recorder Tag Flow R1 Recording Method R1 Value to Record Drag Min to Max DV1 R1 Decimal Position 2 R1 Chart Divisions 100 R1 Zone 1 Low Division 0 R1 Zone 1 High Division 100 R1 Span 1 Low 0 00 GPM R
22. Red Green Blue or Four colors Red Green Blue Black or Violet Section 6 MAJOR LINE PEN COLOR RED Selections Press the a change then to BLUE h EREN desired choice then press t BLACK VIOLET 6 5 Edition 3 RevG 11 Press the to advance to the next parameter MINOR LINE PEN COLOR MINOR LINE PEN COLOR MATCH SCALE COLOR Press the a change then to desired choice then press m ENTER Selections MATCH SCALE COLOR SELECT A COLOR 12 Press the to advance to the next parameter MINOR LINE PEN COLOR only seen if MINOR LINE PEN COLOR selected was SELECT A COLOR MINOR LINE PEN COLOR Note Valid choice of color RED depends on number of colors specified when ordered One color Red Two colors Red Green Dn Three colors Red Selections Press the m to change then to Green Blue or Four BLUE colors Green Blue desired choice then press the Black or Violet BLACK ENTER VIOLET Edition 3 6 6 Section 6 Rev 13 Press the to advance to the next parameter TIME PEN COLOR TIME PEN COLOR RED Note Valid choice of color Press the a change then to depends on number of OE Spo eG WARN GREEN desired choice then press the ordered One color RED ENTER Hed Two colors Red BLACK Green Three colors VIOLET Red Green Blue or Four colors Red Green Blue Black or Violet 14 Press the to adva
23. 4 85 4 89 4 95 5 1 6 1 6 2 7 1 8 1 1 1 D 1 E 1 Edition 3 Rev G SECTION 13 CONTROLLERS 13 1 Entering Controllers 13 2 Control Setpoints 189 3 Control State Access 13 4 Tuning Parameters SECTION 14 PROFILERS 14 1 Profile Entry 14 2 Profile Settings 14 3 Profile Control PAGE 13 1 13 3 13 18 13 22 13 31 14 1 14 1 14 4 14 7 Figures and Tables Figure 1 1 Pen Cartridge Installation Figure 2 1A Mounting Dimensions Figure 2 1B Dimensional Drawing Figure 2 2 Noise Suppression Figure 2 3 Noise Suppression Figure 2 4 Board and Terminal Locations Figure 2 5 Shipped Jumper Positions Figure 2 6A AC Power Connections 115 230 Figure 2 6B AC Power Connection Universal Figure 2 7 TC Connections Figure 2 8 RTD Connections Figure 2 9 Voltage Connections Figure 2 10 Current Connections Figure 2 11 Switch Input Connections Figure 2 12 SPDT Relay Output Figure 2 13 SSR Driver Output Figure 2 14 Current Output Figure 2 15 Transmitter Power Supply Figure 2 16 RS 485 Communications Figure 2 17 RS 232 Communications Figure 3 1 Keypad Figure 3 2 Example of Chart Figure 11 1 Jumper Positions for Calibration Figure A 1 Power Supply Board Figure A 2 Mother Board Figure A 3 Relay SSR Board Figure A 4 Input Board Figure A 5 Motor Driver Board Figure A 6 Current Output Board Figure A 7 Transmitter Power Supply Figure A 8 Communication Board Table 2 1 Board ID Jumpers Table 3 1 Configure
24. Continuous Display Mode cyclically means that the display will alternate between the normal selected value or message display and the highest priority Operator Message Message priority is in order of message number with Operator Message 1 being the highest priority The UP and DOWN keys can be used to change the selected value or message as they normally would In Sequential Display Mode cyclically means that the display will sequence through all normal value displays and then all active Operator Messages Edition 3 C 4 Appendix C Rev G DAxx ITEM System Prompts Configuration Derived Actuators Page 4 80 One of a list of choices that is used to configure a Derived Actuator The list includes actuators and logical operators that are combined to form a logic equation Data collection See Trend data collection DATE FORMAT System Prompts Configuration Instrument Settings Page 4 75 Parameter that specifies the format used to display dates MM DD YY DD MM YY or DD MMM YY DEGREES C F System Prompts Configuration Inputs Page 4 4 Parameter that specifies whether to convert a thermocouple or RTD input to a value corresponding to degrees C or F This is not the same as UNITS which is the text displayed for engineering units DERIVED ACTUATORS System Prompts Configuration Page 4 80 Prompt section to configure Derived Actuators which are the logical combination of individual actuators Up to 24 can be
25. OFF STATE TEXT Olxx OFF STATE TEXT OFF Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for instructions Selections Character Selection 0 P R A T R 5 Press the to advance to the next parameter ON STATE TEXT Olxx ON STATE TEXT ON op BR as Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for Selections Character Selection instructions 6 Press the to advance to the next parameter ACTUATION STYLE Olxx ACTUATION STYLE CONTINUOUS Selections Press the a change then to CONTINUOUS MOMENTARY desired choice then press the Section 4 4 87 Edition 3 Rev G 7 Press the to advance to the next parameter POWER UP STATE Olxx POWER UP STATE SAME Press the change then to Selections OFF ON SAME desired choice then press the 0 P 3 R A T R 8 Press the to advance to the next parameter WHEN DISPLAYED Olxx WHEN DISPLAYED ALWAYS Selections ALWAYS WHEN ENABLED 02 Press the a change then to desired choice then press the 9 Press the and the display advances to the next operator input to be programmed Refer to the beginning of this section page 4 81 Edition 3 4 88 Section 4 Rev G 4 1 15 OPERATOR MESSAGES Operator Messages are user defined messages to advise or provide information via the display that selected actuators are active From the Normal Display press the until CONFIGURATION
26. X PROMPT DVxx INPUT X INPUT 2 A PROMPT DVxx INPUTA INPUT 3 B PROMPT DVxx INPUT B INPUT 4 C PROMPT DVxx INPUT C INPUT 5 D PROMPT DVxx INPUT D ACTUATOR n a RESET n a OUTPUT A X 3 B X 2 C X D LINEAR MASS FLOW AGA LINEAER GAS FLOW INPUT 1 F PROMPT DVxx RAW FLOW INPUT 2 PRES PROMPT DVxx STATIC PRES ABS INPUT 3 TEMPF PROMPT DVxx FLOW TEMP F INPUT 4 COMP PROMPT DVxx COMP CORRECT INPUT 5 PROMPT DVxx SCALING CONST ACTUATOR n a RESET n a OUTPUT C F SQRT PRES TEMPR COMP where TMPR TEMPF 459 67 If INPUT 1 is NOT USED then F 1 If INPUT 2 is NOT USED then PRES 1 If INPUT 3 is NOT USED then TEMPR 1 not TEMPF If INPUT 4 is NOT USED then COMP 1 If INPUT 5 is NOT USED then 1 NOTES F Raw Linear Fow Input PRES Static Pressure must be ABSOLUTE TEMPF Flow Temperature must be degrees F COMP Compressibility Correction C Scaling Constant This function converts TEMP from degrees F to degrees R in the equation DP MASS FLOW AGA 3 DP GAS FLOW INPUT 1 DP PROMPT DVxx DIFFERENT PRES INPUT 2 PRES PROMPT DVxx STATIC PRES ABS INPUT 3 TEMPF PROMPT DVxx FLOW TEMP F INPUT 4 COMP PROMPT DVxx COMP CORRECT INPUT 5 C PROMPT DVxx SCALING CONST ACTUATOR n a RESET n a OUTPUT C SQRT DP PRES TEMPR COMP where TEMPR TEMPF 459 67 If INPUT 1 is NOT USED then DP 1 If INPUT 2 is NOT USED then PRES 1 If INPUT 3 is NOT USED
27. change then to Selections PROMPT NOT DISPLAYED desired choice then press the PROMPT DISPLAYED ENTER 22 Press the to advance to the next parameter CHART SPEED PROMPT CHART SPEED PROMPT PROMPT NOT DISPLAYED Press the a change then to desired choice then press lil f ENTER Selections PROMPT NOT DISPLAYED PROMPT DISPLAYED 23 Press the at any time when not in modify to exit Section 6 6 11 Edition 3 Rev G Section 7 Alarm Settings Selections made in Alarm Settings determine the setpoints or RATE if RATE alarm selected of each alarm configured in the Process Variables section of the Configuration section in System Prompts From the Normal Display press the until ALARM SETTINGS appears in the lower display line If PASS WORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to Alarm Settings is allowed If ALARM SETTINGS is not displayed then Alarm Settings has been disabled or NO alarms have been configured Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Alarm Settings 1 Press the to display ALARMS FOR PV NUMBER ALARMS FOR PV NUMBER Press the a change then to Selections desired choice then press the Alarm Setpoint prompts will only appear for Alarms that have been configured Refer to Section 4 1 5 1104 4 32 2 Press the to advance to the next parameter ALARM 1 SETPOINT If RATE Alarm was sel
28. configured in Process Variables Selections Press the to change then or fcr potion th 0 to 9 9999 decimal position 4 to desired number then press ive RAMP RATE dampens the rate at which the control algorithm will ramp to the control setpoint If the setpoint changes abruptly from one value to another an internal setpoint will be ramping to the selected setpoint SP1 SP2 or Remote at the rate selected in Cx SP RAMP RATE The internal setpoint is viewable by setting the ramped setpoint parameter Cx DISPLAY RAMPED SP located in CONTROLLERS section to something other than NOT DISPLAYED Edition 3 13 32 Section 13 Rev G 4 Press the to advance to the next parameter OUTPUT 1 PROPORTIONAL BAND only if Output 1 Type in CONTROLLERS was set to PID Cx OUT 1 PROP BAND Note Units correspond to Units 100 units configured in Process Variables Selections 0 to 999999 Press the to change then or decimal position 0 0 to 9 9999 decimal position 4 to desired number then press the NOTE When the Process Variable equals the Setpoint the unshifted proportional band provides 0 output 5 Press the to advance to the next parameter OUTPUT 2 PROPORTIONAL BAND only if Output 2 Type in CONTROLLERS was set to PID Cx OUT 2 PROP BAND Note Units correspond to Units 100 units configured in Process Variables Selections 0 to 999999 decimal position 0 Press the B change then D l 010 D 099 dec
29. each Derived Variable Function identifies its corresponding inputs Input choices set to NONE USED will evaluate to zero unless specified otherwise Unless specifically stated it is assumed that all values have been converted to the proper scale and units before being used as an input In some cases temperatures will be automatically converted to the required units as specified Should a divide by zero be attempted the result will be set to 99999 1 SUB MUL DIV EXP LOG 10 LOG e POWER 10 POWER e INPUT 1 A PROMPT DVxx INPUTA INPUT 2 B PROMPT DVxx INPUT B ACTUATOR n a RESET n a OUTPUT for SUB Subtraction A B for MUL Multiplication for DIV Division for EXP Exponent B LOG A forLOG 10 Log to the Base 10 B LN A for LOG e Natural Log B 10 A for POWER 10 Power of 10 B e A for POWER e Power of e For LOG 10 LOG e POWER 10 and POWER e if INPUT 2 is NOT USED then B 1 2 LIN LINEAR INPUT 1 X PROMPT DVxx INPUT X INPUT 2 A PROMPT DVxx INPUT A INPUT 3 B PROMPT DVxx INPUT B ACTUATOR n a RESET n a OUTPUT A X B 3 CUSTOM CURVE 1 through CUSTOM CURVE 4 INPUT 1 X PROMPT DVxx INPUT ACTUATOR n a RESET n a OUTPUT Extrapolated result using the corresponding CUSTOM CURVE NOTES The OUTPUT will be limited by the output values of the first and last POINT PAIR entries Section 4 4 27 Edition 3 Rev G Edition 3 Rev G POLYNOMIAL INPUT 1
30. flow corrected for temperature and pressure The derived value is also converted to a process value for alarming Continued on next page Section 3 3 9 Edition 3 Rev G The value recorded on Pen 2 is the temperature zoned to record 20 to 120 on the lower 10 of the chart and 120 to 210 on the upper 90 of the chart The value recorded on Pen 3 is the pH input 4 zoned to record 0 to 14 on the upper 70 of the chart The value recorded on Pen 4 is the status of alarm A11 zoned to record 0 or 1 at 70 or 80 of the chart Input 3 the pressure is used in the derived value but not recorded TABLE 3 1 Configure Chart Parameters Not all parameters are shown CONFIGURE CHART CHART TYPE USED CHART TYPE RINGS ONLY CHART TAG tttttttttttttttttttt UNIT 1 NORMAL SPEED CHART SPEED 24 HOURS MAJOR TIME PERIODS nn MINOR TIME PERIODS n 4 n 2 ACTION ON NEW CHART NEW CHART ACTION PRINT SCALES Edition 3 3 10 Section 3 Rev TABLE 3 2 Recorder Parameters Not all parameters are shown ALARM 1 Rs RECORDER TAG tttttttttttttttttttt FLOW 1 TEMP 1 PH 1 Rs VALUE TO RECORD VALUE Rs PEN COLOR PEN COLOR BLUE GREEN BLACK RS CHART DIVISIONS nnn 100 100 100 100 Rs ZONE 1 LOW DIVISION nnn 30 70 Rs ZONE 1 HIGH DIVISION nnn 100 10 100 Rs SPAN 1 LOW nnnnnnnuuuuuu 0 GPM 20F 0 PH Rs SPAN 1 HIGH nnnnnnnuuuuuu 400 GPM 120 F 14 PH 1 Rs SCALE 1 INTERVAL nn DIVISIONS 10 10 10 10 Rs ZONE 2 HIGH DIVI
31. then IN CONTINUOUS MODE IN SEQUENTIAL MODE IN BOTH MODES to desired choice then press the 9 Press the and the display advances to the next setpoint to be programmed Refer to the beginning of this section page 13 18 Section 13 13 21 Edition 3 Rev G 13 3 CONTROL STATE ACCESS CONTROL STATE ACCESS provides a quick and convenient method for changing states such as AUTO to MANUAL or LOCAL to REMOTE setpoint If configured when the ois key is pressed a two line prompt is displayed and the Function Keys as configured perform these change state requirements The two line prompt which appears is fully configurable via the CONTROL STATE ACCESS section of CONFIGURATION From the Normal Display press the key until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line If PASS WORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to CON FIGURATION is allowed If CONFIGURATION is not displayed then Configuration has been disabled Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Configuration With CONFIGURATION in the lower display line press the key then the key until CONTROL STATE ACCESS appears in the lower display line Press the key to display CONTROL STATE ACCESS on the upper display line the lower display line This prompt defines the text that will appear in the upper display line when the key is 1 Press the and LINE 1 TEXT appears in the upper
32. then press A21 A22 A23 A24 A31 A32 A33 A34 A41 A42 43 A44 INSTRUMENT ALARM the CHART FULL OPINP1 OPINP2 OPINP3 OP INP 4 OPINP5 OPINP6 OPINP7 OPINP8 OPINP9 OPINP 10 OP INP 11 OP INP 12 CHART CHANGED CHART ROTATION TREND DATA COLLECT ALT CHART SPEED DA1 DA2 DA3 DA4 DA5 DA6 DA7 DA8 DA9 DA10 DA11 DA12 DA13 DA14 DA15 DA16 DA17 DA18 DA19 DA20 DA 1 DA22 DA23 DA24 PRESET1 PRESET2 PRESET3 PRESET4 TOTALPO1 TOTAL PO2 TOTAL TOTAL PO4 TIME 1 TIME DATE 1 TIME2 TIME DATE 2 TIME 1 TO TIME 2 TIME DATE 1 TO 2 TIMER1 TIMER2 TIMER3 TIMER4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 COMM TRIGGER 1 Additional selections for use with controller option COMM TRIGGER 2 OUTPUT 11 X OUTPUT12 COMM TRIGGER 3 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22 COMM TRIGGER 4 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42 RESET MOD ENTER CA1F1 CA1F2 CAIF3 ON THE HOUR CA1F4 CA1F5 DAY OF WEEK CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3 DAY OF MONTH CA2F4 CA2F5 RELAY 1 RELAY 2 CA3F1 CA3F2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 CA3F4 CA3F5 RELAY 5 RELAY 6 CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3 RELAY 7 RELAY 8 CA4F4 CA4F5 Edition 3 6 10 Rev G Section 6 20 Press the to advance to the next parameter CHART ROTATION CHART ROTATION PROMPT DISPLAYED Press the ga change then to desired choice then press E Selections PROMPT NOT DISPLAYED PROMPT DISPLAYED 21 Press the to advance to the next parameter TREND DATA COLLECT TREND DATA COLLECT PROMPT NOT DISPLAYED Press the a
33. 1 TB1 is Input 1 3 5 and 7 and terminal block 2 TB2 is Input 2 4 6 and 8 Connect 3 wire RTD inputs to terminals 2 3 and 4 common legs on terminals 2 and 3 on the Input Board s to be RTD Terminal block 1 TB1 is Input 1 3 5 and 7 and terminal block 2 TB2 is Input 2 4 6 and 8 NOTE INPUT CONDITIONING JUMPERS MUST BE POSITIONED AS SHOWN FOR AN RTD INPUT IN EITHER FIGURE 2 8 OR 2 8A DEPENDING ON WHICH CIRCUIT BOARD IS FITTED FIGURE 2 8 FIGURE 2 8A JU15 JU16 sp d JU7 JU8 JU11 JU2 JU5 JU12 eee E pum ix 3 WIRE RTD JU15 JU16 sr i JU8 JU11 JU2 JU5 JU12 1 t putre ee o o JUMPER Customer Supplied 2 WIRE RTD NOTE Terminal Block 1 Terminal 1 is on the RIGHT Terminal Block 2 Terminal 1 is on the LEFT Edition 3 2 10 Section 2 Rev G 2 3 6 VOLTAGE CONNECTIONS Note Up to four Input Boards may be present stacked 4 high Input Board 1 is the bottom board Two versions of Input Board s may be found see Figure 2 9 and Figure 2 9A Input Board 1 is used for Input 1 and if equipped Input 2 Input Board 2 is used for Input 3 and Input 4 if equipped Input Board 3 is for Input 5 and Input 6 Input Board 4 is for Input 7 and Input 8 Connect positive leg to terminal 1 and negative leg to terminal 2 on the Input Board s to be volt input Terminal block 1 TB1 is Input 1 3 5 and 7 and terminal block 2 TB2
34. 1 With PROFILE SETTINGS in the lower display line press the DOWN key then the SCROLL key until PROFILE ENTRY appears in the upper display line Selections are DISABLED DURING RUN or EN ABLE DURING RUN Press the MOD key to change then UP DOWN as required to desired choice then press the ENTER key Profile Entry This parameter controls access to the PROFILE ENTRY section while the profile is running DISABLED prevents access while ENABLED allows access 2 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter PROFILE START ACTUATOR See Actuator List for selections Press the MOD key to change then LEFT SCROLL UP DOWN as required to desired choice then press the ENTER key Profile Start Actuator A transition from not active to active of the PROFILE START ACTUATOR will initiate the selected profile 3 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter PROFILE SELECTOR See Choice List for selections Press the MOD key to change then LEFT SCROLL UP DOWN as required to desired choice then press the ENTER key Profile Selector Applies only when the PROFILE START ACTUATOR is used and allows an analog value typically from an IV to select the profile number to be initiated Care must be taken to insure that a valid value is provided The value is automatically rounded to the nearest whole number 4 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter PROFILE ABORT ACTUATOR See Actua tor List for selections Press the MOD
35. 14 Section 2 2 4 3 CURRENT OUTPUT Note Up to two boards may be present stacked 2 high Board 1 is the bottom board Non isolated and isolated outputs are available Non isolated Non isolated current outputs are designated as current output 1 through current output 2 Current output 1 is located on Board 1 and Current Output 2 is located on Board 2 Connections are made as shown Terminal connections are made using TB1 terminal 1 is positive and terminal 2 is negative FIGURE 2 14 Isolated Isolated current outputs are designated current output 1 through current output 4 Current output 1 and if speci fied current output 2 are located on board 1 Current outputs 3 and 4 if specified are located on board 2 Connections are made as shown Terminal connections are made using TB1 output 1 and 3 terminal 1 is positive and terminal 2 is negative and TB2 output 2 and 4 terminal 1 is positive and terminal 2 is negative FIGURE 2 14B TB1 TB2 1 2 1 2 Load Load O Q Section 2 2 15 Edition 3 Rev G 2 4 4 24VDC TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY Note Up to four transmitter power supplies may be present One transmitter can provide up to 25mA of current at 24 VDC Transmitter outputs are designated as Transmitter Output 1 through Transmitter Output 4 Transmitter Output 1 is at TB1 Transmitter Output 2
36. 33 0 28 0 68 2 29 0 09 0 202 0 300 1 54 0 12 0 77 2 43 0 03 0 235 D 1800 2800 1 88 0 38 0 90 3 26 0 05 0 287 300 1800 1 32 0 40 0 68 2 40 0 15 0 201 0 300 1 75 0 26 0 85 2 86 0 03 0 267 NNM 450 1370 0 44 0 33 0 33 1 10 0 09 0 067 0 450 0 56 0 13 0 37 1 06 0 05 0 085 Platinel 11 1000 1400 0 72 0 28 0 44 144 0 04 0 110 500 1000 059 0 20 0 38 147 0 05 0 089 0 500 0 62 0 10 0 40 142 0 05 0 095 1 7 Section 1 Edition 3 Rev G ACCURACY TABLES CONT To achieve stated results the following thermocouples must be used with the INPUT TYPE RANGE set to TC NARROW Rev G See Note 1 2 3 4 5 6 TC RANGE REF LIN FACTORY REF LIN DEVIATION RESOL TYPE ACC Y ACC Y CAL CAL ACC Y C bit T 0 400 0 12 0 09 0 34 0 55 0 04 0 018 200 0 0 23 0 19 0 70 1 12 0 02 0 036 250 220 0 73 0 36 1 90 2 98 0 00 0 111 R 800 1700 0 43 0 19 0 83 1 45 0 09 0 065 200 800 0 58 0 25 1 08 1 90 0 06 0 088 S 250 1750 0 56 0 25 1 05 1 87 0 15 0 086 B 200 1800 0 74 0 31 1 84 2 39 0 16 0 113 See Note 1 2 3 4 5 6 HID RANGE REF LIN FACTORY REF LIN DEVIATION RESOL TYPE ACC Y ACC Y CAL CAL ACC Y Bp C bit 385 160 480 0 16 0 03 0 13 0 33 0 06 0 025 DIN 200 160 0 14 0 20 0 12 0 46 0 00 0 022 392 100 450 0 16 0 03 0 13 0 32 0 05 0 025 USA 392 200 560 0 29 d 0 24 0 66 0 06 044 ois 100 ohm 40 200 0 09 0 05 0 07 0 21 0
37. CAS F4 LINE 1 TEXT CAS F4 OFF STATE TEXT CAS F4 ON STATE TEXT CAS F5 KEY USAGE CAS F5 LINE 1 TEXT CAS F5 OFF STATE TEXT F5 ON STATE TEXT Edition 3 3 38 Section 3 Rev G Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration CONTROL STATE ACCESS Parameter CA4 LINE 1 TEXT CA4 LINE 2 TEXT CA4 F1 KEY USAGE CA4 1 LINE 1 TEXT CA4 1 OFF STATE TEXT CA4 F1 ON STATE TEXT CA4 F2 KEY USAGE CA4 F2 LINE 1 TEXT CA4 F2 OFF STATE TEXT CA4 F2 ON STATE TEXT CA4 F3 KEY USAGE CA4 F3 LINE 1 TEXT CA4 F3 OFF STATE TEXT CA4 F3 ON STATE TEXT CA4 F4 KEY USAGE CA4 F4 LINE 1 TEXT CA4 F4 OFF STATE TEXT CA4 F4 ON STATE TEXT CA4 F5 KEY USAGE CA4 F5 LINE 1 TEXT CA4 F5 OFF STATE TEXT CA4 F5 ON STATE TEXT Section 3 3 39 Edition 3 Rev G Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration SIMULATED VARIABLES Parameter DISPLAY TAG TYPE DISPLAY UNITS C F Other C F Other C F Other F Other OTHER UNITS DECIMAL POSITION RANGE LOW RANGE HIGH PERIOD 1 FREQ minutes minutes minutes minutes DISPLAY OPTION Edition 3 3 40 Section 3 Rev Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration CHART PROGRAMMING Select Chart Configuration CHART SIZE CHART TYPE USED CHART TAG NORMAL SPEED MAJOR TIME PERIODS MINOR TIME PERIODS BLANK MAJOR PERIODS ALTERNATE
38. CHART CHANGED CHART ROTATION TREND DATA COLLECT ALT CHART SPEED DA1 DA2 DA4 DA5 DA6 DA7 DA8 DA9 DA10 DA11 DA12 DA13 DA14 DA15 DA16 DA17 DA18 DA19 DA20 DA 1 DA22 DA23 DA24 PRESET1 PRESET 2 PRESET3 PRESET 4 TOTALPO1 TOTAL PO2 TOTALPO3 TOTAL PO4 TIME1 TIME DATE 1 TIME2 TIME DATE 2 TIME 1 TO TIME 2 TIME DATE 1 TO2 TIMER1 TIMER2 TIMER3 TIMER4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 COMM TRIGGER 1 Additional selections for use with controller option COMM TRIGGER 2 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12 COMM TRIGGER 3 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22 COMM TRIGGER 4 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32 F1 F2 F8 F4 F5 OUTPUT41 OUTPUT42 RESET MOD ENTER CA1F1 CA1F2 1 ON THE HOUR CA1F4 CA1F5 DAY OF WEEK CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3 DAY OF MONTH CA2F4 CA2F5 RELAY 1 RELAY 2 1 2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 4 CA3F5 RELAY 5 RELAY 6 CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3 RELAY 7 RELAY 8 CA4F4 CA4F5 N S T R U M E N T 5 T G S Edition 3 4 76 Section 4 Rev G 5 Press the key to advance to the next parameter CONTROL ON ACTUATOR only seen on controller CONTROL ON ACTUATOR ON CONTINUOUS Selections NONE OFF STAY ALAR S ANY ALARM ANY PROCESS ALARM Press the to change then A11 12 A13 14 21 22 23 24 as required to desired choice then A31 A32 A33 A34 a q M1 A42 M3 A44 INSTRUMENT ALARM CHART FULL OPINP1 OPINP2 OPINP3 OPINP4 press the OPINP5 OP INP 6 OP INP7 OP INP 8 OPINP9 OP INP 10 OP INP 11 OP INP 12 C
39. Chart Parameters Table 3 2 Recorder Parameters Table 10 1 Available Tests Table 11 1 Calibration Routines Table 11 2 Range Select Table 11 3 Input Board Jumper Positions Edition 3 Rev 2 1 2 2 2 4 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 14 2 15 2 15 2 16 2 16 3 2 3 12 11 3 A 1 A 3 A 4 A 6 A 7 A 8 2 7 3 10 3 11 10 1 11 1 11 2 11 3 Prefix amp Table of Contents Section 1 Introduction and General Information This instrument is a microprocessor based circular chart recorder capable of measuring displaying and recording from a variety of inputs Applications include temperature level pressure flow and others The instrument can be specified as either a one two three or four pen model The standard process sensor inputs up to 8 total inputs are user configurable to directly connect to and convert thermocouple RTD millivolt volt milliamp or contact closure inputs Thermocouple and RTD linearization as well as thermocouple cold junction compensation are performed automatically Up to four individually isolated 24 VDC regulated transmitter power supplies are available for transmitter inputs each providing up to 25 mADC Using the optional math capability mass flow BTUs relative humidity and other derived variables can be calcu lated as well as simple math functions performed and custom curve conversions Optional totalization is avail able for input values or deriv
40. DA23 DA6 DA9 DA12 DA15 DA18 DA21 DA24 PRESET 2 3 PRESET 4 PRESET TOTAL PO1 TOTAL 2 TOTAL PO3 TOTAL PO4 TIME 1 TIME DATE 1 TIME 2 TIME DATE 2 TIME 1 TO TIME 2 TIME DATE 1 TO 2 TIMER 1 TIMER 3 TIMER 2 TIMER 4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 COMM TRIGGER 1 COMM TRIGGER 2 COMM TRIGGER 3 COMM TRIGGER 4 Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 RESET MOD ENTER ON THE HOUR ON THE WEEK DAY OF MONTH RELAY 1 RELAY 3 RELAY 5 RELAY 7 CATFI CAIF4 CA2F1 CA2F4 CA3FI CA3F4 CA4F1 CA4F4 POWER PROFILE AUTO HOLDING PROFILE OFF CONTROL Edition 3 Rev G RELAY 2 RELAY 4 RELAY 6 RELAY 8 CAIF2 1 CAIF5 CA2F2 CA2C3 CA2F5 CA3F2 CA3C3 5 CA4F2 CA4C3 CA4F5 FAILED PROFILE ACTIVE PROFILE COMPLETE PROFILE ABORTED PROFILE HOLDING PROFILE ACTIVE is true whenever a profile is running or holding not aborted or com plete PROFILE COMPLETE is true when a profile has run to completion PROFILE ABORTED is true whenever a profile has been aborted PROFILE HOLDING and time not advancing and PROFILE AUTO HOLD ING holding due to deviation hold after ramping are self explanatory The PROFILE OFF CONTROL actuator is controlled by the END ACTION ABORT ACTION and POWERFAIL ACTION choices whenever a profile completes is aborted or power fails respectively When this capabil ity is desired the PROFILE OFF CONTROL actuator must be selected for the CONTROL ON ACTUATO
41. DAY OF WEEK ACTUATOR selected is THUR the actuator will be true until the clock calendar rolls over to FRIDAY Edition 3 8 4 Section 8 Rev G 8 Press the to advance to the next parameter DAY OF OF MONTH ACTUATOR DAY OF MONTH ACT Press the a change 1 io 31 to desired value then press the Day of Month Actuator works according to the days numerical date For example if today s date is the 15th the DAY OF MONTH ACTUATOR date is selected is 15 the actuator will be active until the clock calendar rolls over to the 16th 9 Press the to advance to the next parameter TIME DISPLAY OPTION TIME DISPLAY OPTION NOT DISPLAYED Selections NOT DISPLAYED Press the a change then to IN CONTINUOUS MODE IN SEQUENTIAL MODE IN BOTH MODES desired choice then press the ENTER 10 Press the at any time while not in modify to exit Refer to the beginning of this section page 8 1 Section 8 8 5 Edition 3 Rev G Section 9 Enables amp Passwords Enables and Passwords provides a means of enabling or disabling prompt sections and provides additional operational security with the use of 6 digit password If the Display prompts or Chart prompts are disabled those prompt sections will not be accessible and DISPLAY KEY DISABLED or CHART KEY DISABLED will be displayed when the corresponding key is pressed If other prompt sections are disabled their corresponding access or selection prompts will
42. E is the number of inputs that are CONFIGURED Section 4 4 31 3 Rev G P R 0 S S V A R L 3 4 1 5 PROCESS VARIABLES Process Variables define variables for use with alarms and or control outputs From the Normal Display press the 8 CONFIGURATION is seen the lower display line If PASS WORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to Configu ration is allowed If CONFIGURATION is not displayed then Configuration has been disabled Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Configuration With CONFIGURATION in the display press ne then ve usi PROCESS VARIABLES appears in the lower display line 1 Press the to display PROCESS VALUE NUMBER PROCESS VALUE NUMBER Press the a change then to desired number then press 1 ENTER Selections 1104 2 Press the OR advance to the next parameter COPY INITIALIZE PVx COPY INITIALIZE NO Press 9 change then to desired choice then press the m ENTER Selections NO or YES Select YES if the parameters to be programmed are the same as another PROCESS VARIABLE already pro grammed Edition 3 4 32 Section 4 Rev G If selection is NO proceed to step 3 If selection is YES PVx COPY FROM PV 0 INITIALIZE Process Variable to be copied from Press the to change to the process 0 FACTORY DEFAULT variab
43. F5 OUTPUT41 OUTPUT42 RESET MOD ENTER CAiFi CATF2 1 ON THE HOUR CA1F4 CA1F5 DAY OF WEEK CA2F1 2 2 CA2F3 DAY OF MONTH CA2F4 CA2F5 RELAY 1 RELAY 2 CA3F1 CA3F2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 4 5 RELAY 5 RELAY 6 CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3 RELAY 7 RELAY 8 CA4F4 CA4F5 Qo lt gt 2 Section 4 4 69 Edition 3 Rev G lt gt mI 4 Press the to advance to the next parameter RELAY T P VALUE only seen if RELAY USAGE selected was TIME PROPORTIONING RELAY x T P VALUE NONE USED Press to change then as required to desired choice then DV4 DV5 DV6 v ENTER DV7 DV8 DV9 DV10 DV11 DV12 Additional selections for use with controller option CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4 SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12 TOTAL1 TOTAL2 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22 TOTAL3 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32 SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4 OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42 Selections NONE USED IV1 V2 IV3 IV4 IV5 IV6 IV7 1 8 PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4 DVi DV2 5 Press M advance to the next parameter CYCLE TIME only seen if RELAY USAGE selected is TIME PROPORTIONING RELAY x CYCLE TIME 1 SECONDS Selections m E 1 to 240 Press the to change then to desired value then press the ENTER 6 Press the and the display advances to the next relay to be programmed Refer to the beginning of this section page 4 66 Edition 3 4 70 Section 4 Rev G 4 1 11 CURRE
44. ON CONTINUOUS ANY ALARM 4 ANY PROCESS ALARM j j ENTER to desired choice then press the A21 A22 A23 A24 A31 A32 A33 A34 41 A42 A43 44 INSTRUMENT ALARM CHART FULL OPINP 1 OPINP2 OPINP3 OPINP4 OPINP5 OPINP6 OPINP7 OPINP8 OPINP9 OPINP 10 OP INP 11 OP INP 12 CHART CHANGED CHART ROTATION TREND DATA COLLECTION DA1 DA2 DAS DA4 DAS DA6 DA7 DA8 DA9 DA10 DA11 DA12 DA13 DA14 DA15 DA16 DA17 DA18 DA19 DA20 DA21 DA22 DA23 DA24 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 22 OUTPUT31 OUTPUT 32 OUTPUT41 OUTPUT 42 PRESET1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO 2 TOTAL TOTAL PO 4 TIME 1 TIME DATE 1 TIME 2 TIME DATE 2 TIME 1 TO TIME 2 TIME DATE 1 TO 2 TIMER 1 TIMER 2 TIMER 3 TIMER 4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 COMM TRIGGER 1 COMM TRIGGER 2 COMM TRIGGER 3 COMM TRIGGER 4 F1 F2 F3 F4 RESET MOD ENTER ON THE HOUR DAY OF WEEK DAY OF MONTH RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY3 RELAY 4 RELAY 5 RELAY 6 RELAY 7 RELAY 8 CA1F1 CA1F2 CA1F3 CA1F5 CA1F5 CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3 CA2F5 CA2F5 CA3F1 CA3F2 CA3F3 CA3F5 CA3F5 CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3 CA4F5 CA4F5 CA5F1 CA5F2 CA5F3 CA5F5 CA5F5 Cx Manual Actuator selects the actuator when true switches the instrument to the MANUAL mode of control and when false switches back to AUTO mode SSS Section 13 13 9 Edition 3 Rev G 14 Press the to advance to the next parameter AUTO MANUAL AUTO TRANSFER only if MANUAL ACTUATOR is not NONE OFF Cx AUTO M A TRANSFER NOTE If
45. OPINP8 OPINP9 OPINP 10 OP INP 11 OP INP 12 CHART CHANGED CHART ROTATION TREND DATA COLLECT ALT CHART SPEED DA1 DA2 DA4 DA5 DA6 DA7 DA8 DAQ DA10 DA11 DA12 DA13 DA14 DA15 DA16 DA17 DA18 DA19 DA20 DA 1 DA22 DA23 DA24 1 2 PRESET PRESET 4 TOTAL PO1 TOTAL 2 TOTAL TOTAL PO4 TIME 1 TIME DATE 1 TIME 2 TIME DATE 2 TIME 1 TO TIME 2 TIME DATE 1 TO 2 TIMER1 TIMER2 TIMER3 TIMER 4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 COMM TRIGGER 1 COMM TRIGGER 2 COMM TRIGGER 3 COMM TRIGGER 4 Fi F2 F3 F4 F5 RESET MOD ENTER ON THE HOUR DAY OF WEEK DAY OF MONTH RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 RELAY 5 RELAY 6 RELAY 7 RELAY 8 Press ino Ed to change then as required to desired choice then press the E ENTER Additional selections for use with controller option TPUT 11 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT 41 CAIF1 CA1F4 CA2F1 2 4 CA3F1 CA3F4 CMF1 CA4F4 4 65 CAIF2 CA2F2 CA3F2 CA4F2 OUTPUT 12 OUTPUT22 OUTPUT22 OUTPUT42 CAIF3 CA1F5 2 2 5 5 CA4F3 CA4F5 Qo 29 m zx gomr go ODMS A 7 Press I to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY OPTION TMx DISPLAY OPTION IN BOTH MODES Selections r1 NOT DISPLAYED Press the to change then to IN CONTINUOUS MODE IN SEQUENTIAL MODE desired choice then press the IN BOTH MODES 8 Press MC and the display advances to the next timer to be programmed Refer to the beginn
46. PER TIME FORMAT e SELECTED IN INSTRUMENT SETTINGS Press the to change then desired value then press the Change and enter each portion of the date Edition 3 8 2 Section 8 Rev G 4 Press the to advance to the next parameter TIME 2 TAG TIME 2 TAG STOP TIME Selections Text Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for instructions 5 Press the advance to the next parameter TIME 2 TIME 2 format 06 00 AM FORMAT AND Press the 2a change then ENTRY PER TIME FORMAT to desired value then press SELECTED IN INSTRUMENT SETTINGS ne 9 Change and enter each portion of the time CONFIGURATION Section 8 8 3 Edition 3 Rev G 6 Press the to advance to the next parameter DATE 2 DATE 2 format XX XX XX FORMAT AND Will read current date ENTRY PER TIME FORMAT SELECTED IN Press ine Ed change then INSTRUMENT SETTINGS to desired value then press the e CONFIGURATION Change and enter each portion of the date 7 Press the advance to the next parameter DAY OF WEEK ACTUATOR DAY OF WEEK ACTUATOR SUN Press the a change then SUN TUE WED THUR FRI SAT to desired value then press the Day of Week Actuator works in conjunction with the CURRENT DAY entry under INSTRUMENT SETTINGS page 4 76 The DAY OF WEEK ACTUATOR will be active if the day selected matches the current calender day For example if today is THURSDAY and the
47. POSITION OF OUTPUT NUMBER OF POINTS POINT PAIR 01 POINT PAIR 02 POINT PAIR 03 POINT PAIR 04 POINT PAIR 05 POINT PAIR 06 POINT PAIR 07 POINT PAIR 08 POINT PAIR 09 POINT PAIR 10 POINT PAIR 11 POINT PAIR 12 POINT PAIR 13 POINT PAIR 14 POINT PAIR 15 POINT PAIR 16 POINT PAIR 17 POINT PAIR 18 POINT PAIR 19 POINT PAIR 20 POINT PAIR 21 Edition 3 Rev G 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 V W V W 3 20 Section 3 Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration DERIVED VARIABLES Parameter DISPLAY TAG FUNCTION INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT ACTUATOR RESET ACTUATOR DISPLAY UNITS UNITS DESCRIPTION DECIMAL POSITION VALUE FILTER seconds seconds seconds DISPLAY OPTION DISPLAY FILTER seconds seconds seconds Parameter DISPLAY TAG FUNCTION INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT ACTUATOR RESET ACTUATOR DISPLAY UNITS UNITS DESCRIPTION DECIMAL POSITION VALUE FILTER seconds seconds seconds DISPLAY OPTION DISPLAY FILTER seconds seconds seconds Section 3 3 21 Edition 3 RevG Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration DERIVED VARIABLES Parameter
48. PROCESS ALARM A11 A12 A13 A14 A21 A22 A23 A24 A31 A32 A33 A34 M1 M2 M3 44 INSTRUMENT ALARM CHART FULL OPINP1 OPINP2 OPINP3 OPINP4 OPINP5 OPINP6 OPINP7 OPINP8 OPINP9 OPINP 10 OP INP 11 OP INP 12 CHART CHANGED CHART ROTATION TREND DATA COLLECT ALT CHART SPEED DA1 DA2 DA4 DA5 DAG DA7 DA8 DA9 DA10 DA11 DA12 DA13 DA14 DA15 DA16 DA17 DA18 DA19 DA20 DA21 DA22 DA23 DA24 PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2 TOTAL TOTAL PO4 TIME 1 TIME DATE 1 TIME 2 2 TIME 1 TO TIME 2 TIME DATE 1 TO2 TIMER1 TIMER2 TIMER3 TIMER 4 SW1SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 COMM TRIGGER 1 COMM TRIGGER 2 COMM TRIGGER 3 COMM TRIGGER 4 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 RESET MOD ENTER ON THE HOUR DAY OF WEEK DAY OF MONTH RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 RELAY 5 RELAY 6 RELAY 7 RELAY 8 Section 4 Press the a change then as required to desired choice the press M Additional selections for use with controller option UT 11 UT 21 UT 31 UT 41 CAIF1 2 CA1F4 CA2F2 CA2F 1 CA2F4 2 CA4F2 OUTPUTI2 OUTPUT22 OUTPUT32 OUTPUT42 CAIF3 CATF5 CA2F3 CA2F5 5 CA4F3 CA4F5 1 4 CMF1 CA4F4 4 91 n Edition 3 Rev 0 P R A T 0 R S S G 4 Press the to advance to the next parameter LINE 1 TEXT OMxx LINE 1 TEXT MESSAGE X Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for Selections C
49. RATE Alarm is selected Hysteresis equals in units TIME BASE Edition 3 4 38 Section 4 Rev G 15 Press the advance to the next parameter ALARM 2 TYPE Ax2 ALARM TYPE OFF Selections for recorder only PROCESS HIGH PROCESS LOW RATE RISING RATE FALLING Press change then to Additional selections for use desired choice then press the with controller option BAND WITHIN BAND OUTSIDE DEVIATION ABOVE DEVIATION BELOW CONTROL LOOP OPEN When CONTROL LOOP OPEN is selected for ALARM TYPE and NON PID is selected for CONTROL TYPE CONTROLLERS section of CONFIGURATION prompt LOOP ALARM TYPE will be displayed 16 Press the to advance to the next parameter ALARM 2 TIME BASE only seen if Ax2 TYPE is RATE Ax2 TIME BASE PER SEC P R S S V R L 3 S Press 9 change then to desired choice then press Selections PERSEC PER MIN PERHOUR PER DAY Section 4 4 39 Edition 3 Rev G 17 Press the advance to the next parameter ALARM 2 SAMPLE PERIOD only seen if 2 TYPE is RATE Ax2 SAMPLE PERIOD 10 SECONDS Press 8 change then to Selections 1 to 9999 seconds desired value then press 18 Press the OR advance to the next parameter ALARM 2 HYSTERESIS Note Units correspond Ax2 HYSTERESIS to units configured in Process Variables 3 uni ts Selections Press Ed change th
50. SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter PROFILE RUN HOLD only seen if RUN START selected above Displayed in AMM selections are RUN or HOLD Press the key directly below the choice to enter Profile Run Hold A profile put into HOLD will stop the ramp or dwell segment currently running If the profiler is in HOLD no action is taken If RUN is selected a profile in HOLD will resume from the current profile segment and time selected If the profiler is in RUN when RUN is selected no action is taken 5 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter CURRENT PROFILE Selections are 1 to 16 Press the MOD key to change then press the UP DOWN as required to desired choice then press the ENTER key Current Profile If a profile is not running this parameter can be modified to change the current active profile When RUN is selected under PROFILE RUN HOLD the profiler will begin running the current profile selected 6 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter CURRENT DESCRIPTION This is a READ ONLY parameter Current Description The current description corresponds to the profile description entered under PROFILE ENTRY Section 14 14 7 Edition 3 RevG 3 RevG 7 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter CURRENT SEGMENT Selections are 1 8 Press the MOD key to change then the UP DOWN as required to the desired choice then press the ENTER key Only modifiable if profile is presentl
51. SPACTUATOR REMOTE SP SOURCE 2nd SP ACTUATOR 2nd SP SOURCE REMOTE SP RATIO REMOTE SP BIAS FEED FWD SOURCE FEED FWD HIGH FEED FWD LOW DISP SELECT SP DISP RAMPED SP DISP OUTPUTS Edition 3 3 24 Section 3 RevG Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration CONTROL SETPOINTS Parameter Setpoint 1 Setpoint 2 Setpoint 3 Setpoint 4 PROMPT TEXT DISPLAY UNITS OTHER UNITS DEC POSITION UPPER LIMIT LOWER LIMIT DISP OPTION Parameter Setpoint 1 Setpoint 2 Setpoint 3 Setpoint 4 PROMPT TEXT DISPLAY UNITS OTHER UNITS DEC POSITION UPPER LIMIT LOWER LIMIT DISP OPTION If the prompt text is blank the setpoint is disabled and the remaining prompts will not be seen The setpoint will also not appear in the setpoint sub menu of the DISPLAY menu Section 3 3 25 Edition 3 Rev G Parameter RECORDER TAG Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration RECORDERS VALUE TO RECORD PEN COLOR RECORDING METHOD DECIMAL POSITION CHART DIVISIONS ZONE 1 LOW division division division division ZONE 1 HIGH division division division division SPAN 1 LOW SPAN 1 HIGH SCALE 1 INTERVAL divisions divisions divisions divisions ZONE 2 HIGH division division division division SPAN 2 HIGH SCALE 2 INTERVAL divisions div
52. best circulated area Section 2 2 5 Edition 3 Rev G 2 3 WIRING CONNECTIONS INPUTS All wiring connections are typically made to the instrument at the time of installation Connections should be made at the terminal blocks one 14 gauge wire maximum using copper conductors except for thermocouple inputs See Figure 2 4 below for the terminal block locations The recommended torque for the AC Mains connector on the power supply board is 1130z ins and the recommended torque for all other connectors in the unit is 850z ins FIGURE 2 4 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY BOARD COMMUNICATIONS BOARD MOTHER BOARD AC MAINS The instrument case may have numerous conduit openings EC1 EC6 depending upon the number of inputs and outputs specified EC5 and EC6 are not included on all models To help minimize electrical noise that may adversely affect the operation of the instrument do not run input and or 4 20mA output connections through the same conduit entry as relay or power supply connections See Figure 2 1B page 2 2 for conduit opening locations Edition 3 2 6 Rev G Section 2 2 3 1 SHIPPED CONFIGURATION JUMPER POSITIONING Each instrument is factory shipped with all parameters set to default values These defaults are shown in the display box for each parameter in Section 4 Jumpers are used to condition the sensor inputs All jumpers are located on the Input Board s The instrument is
53. configured DERIVED VARIABLES System Prompts Configuration Page 4 18 Prompt section containing parameters which configure Derived Variables which are the mathematical result of other variables and constants DISABLED System Prompts Enables amp Passwords Section 9 Choice which causes the corresponding prompt section to be inaccessible by the operator DISP Key The DISP Display key is used to enter the Display Prompts section and to step through the individual Display Prompts DISPLAY FILTER System Prompts Configuration Inputs Process Variable Derived Variable Parameter that specifies the filtering to be applied to the value for display purposes only This filter does not affect the IV PV DV etc as it is used for alarming recording or any other purpose Zero specifies no filtering A value of 1 to 9999 specifies the number of seconds over which values will be accumulated prior to calculating a new average for display Note When Value Filter is used its value will affect the displayed value See VALUE FIL TER DISPLAY FORMAT Display Prompts Page 5 2 Parameter that specifies the desired display formats 1 value at a time 2 values at a time or 4 process variables at time with the displayed choices being 1 VAL 2 VALS and 4 PVS Refer to Section 5 of this manual for details DISPLAY FORMAT System Prompts Configuration Totalizers Page 4 56 Parameter that specifies the display format for the total DIGI
54. designed to promote proper separation of the wiring groups that connect to the instrument The AC power wire terminals are located near the bottom of the power supply board The analog signal terminals are located near the bottom of the instrument boards Maintain this separation of the wires to insure the best protec tion from electrical noise If the wires need to be run parallel with any other wiring type s maintain a minimum 6 inch space between the wires If wires must cross each other do so at 90 degrees to minimize the contact with each other and reduce cross talk Cross talk is due to the electro magnetic field induced by a wire as current passes through it Section 2 2 3 Edition 3 Rev G Use of Shielded Cable Shielded cable helps eliminate electrical noise being induced on the wires All analog signals should be run with shielded cable Connection lead length should be kept as short as possible keeping the wires protected by the shielding The shield should be grounded at one end only The preferred grounding location is at the sensor transmitter or transducer Noise Suppression at the Source Usually when good wiring practices are followed no further noise protection is necessary Sometimes in severe electrical environments the amount of noise is so great that it has to be suppressed at the source Many manu facturers of relays contactors etc supply surge suppressors which mount on the noise source For those device
55. display line and CONTROLLER x STATES m in pressed while in the Normal Display CA1 LINETEXT CONTROLLER x SEEDS Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text for instructions NOTE If the CONTROL STATE ACCESS is not being used for Controller 1 it is suggested that this prompt be blank Edition 3 13 22 Section 13 Rev G 2 Press the to advance to the next parameter LINE 2 TEXT CAx LINE 2 TEXT AM SP1 SP2 L R eee Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text for instructions NOTE If the CONTROL STATE ACCESS is not being used for Controller 1 OR if SP1 SP2 AND OR LOCAL REMOTE L R it is suggested that this prompt be blank 3 Press the to advance to the next parameter F1 KEY USAGE CAx Fi KEY USAGE Cx AUTO MANUAL Selections n r 1 AUTO MANUAL n C2 AUTO MANUAL Press the to change then 4 or AUTO MANUAL REMOTE to desired choice then press the E SP1 SP2 CUSTOM Section 13 13 23 Edition 3 Rev G 4 Press the 8 advance the next parameter F1 LINE 1 TEXT CAx F1 LINE 1 TEXT CONTROLLER 1 1 Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text for instructions 5 Press the to advance to the next parameter F1 OFF STATE TEXT only seen if KEY USAGE selected was CUSTOM CAx F1 OFF STATE TXT AUTOMATIC Selections TEXT Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text for instructions 6 Press the to advance to the next parameter F1 ON STATE TEXT only seen if KEY USAGE
56. for configuring the setpoint 3 Press the to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY UNITS SPx DISPLAY UNITS M UM Press the to change then to desired choice then press the or press the key directly below the desired choice 4 lf DISPLAY UNITS selected was OTHER press the to advance to the next parameter OTHER UNITS SPx OTHER UNITS D Selections TEXT Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text for instructions Section 13 13 19 Edition 3 Rev G 5 Press the to advance to the next parameter DECIMAL POSITION SPx DECIMAL POSITION 0104 Press the 2a change then to desired number then press vg 6 Press the to advance to the next parameter UPPER LIMIT SPx UPPER LIMIT Units correspond to units 100 UNITS configured in Steps 3 or 4 above Selections x 999999 Press the a change then decimal positon 0 decimal position 4 Im I then press ve f desired value or 7 Press the to advance to the next parameter LOWER LIMIT SPx LOWER LIMIT 0 UNITS Units correspond to units configured in Steps 3 or 4 above Selections 999999 Press the 2a change then decimal position 0 9 9999 decimal position 4 desired value or then then press the Edition 3 13 20 Section 13 Rev G 8 Press the to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY OPTION SPx DISPLAY OPTION NOT DISPLAYED Selections NOT DISPLAYED Press the 0 to change
57. have up to 8 inputs configured INPUT SCAN SEQUENCE prompt allows the scan rate to be changed Select the scan rate closest to the rate required NOTE The total of inputs must be equal to or greater than the actual number of inputs configured Example 4 Inputs Configured Require One input scan of 8 sec One input scan of 4 sec Two inputs scan of 1 sec each Select 11 85 11 45 41 15 IV1 is 8 scans sec IV2 is 4 scans sec and IV3 through IV6 are 1 scan sec Note that it does no harm to include unused inputs in the scan sequence as they will be ignored N S R S G S amp D R V A U A T R S Section 4 4 81 Edition 3 Rev G 17 Press the and the display advances to INSTRUMENT TAG To exit press the Refer to the beginning of this section page 4 72 4 1 13 DERIVED ACTUATORS Derived Actuators are used when two or more actuators need to be combined logically From the Normal Display press the until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to Configuration is allowed If CONFIGURATION is not displayed then Configuration has been disabled Refer to Section 9 En ables and Passwords for instructions to enable Configuration With CONFIGURATION in the display press the then the until DERIVED ACTUATORS appears in the lower display line 1 Press
58. is for Input 2 4 6 and 8 NOTE INPUT CONDITIONING JUMPERS MUST BE POSITIONED AS SHOWN FOR A T C INPUT IN EITHER FIGURE 2 7 OR 2 7A DEPENDING ON WHICH CIRCUIT BOARD IS FITTED JUMPERS JU7 JU8 MAY BE MOVED TO THE NARROW SPAN POSITION FOR BETTER RESOLUTION IF THE MAXIMUM TEMPERA TURE DOES NOT EXCEED THE UPPER SPAN LIMIT AS SHOWN IN APPENDIX B PAGE B 1 AND THE THERMOCOUPLE BEING USED IS J K E or N ONLY FIGURE 2 7 FIGURE 2 7A INPUT 1 3 5 7 INPUT INPUT 2 4 6 8 INPUT 1 3 5 7 INPUT INPUT 2 4 6 8 JU7 SPAN JU8 JU7 SPAN U8 NARROW NARROW 5 T C T C ojojo ojojo elele elele WIDE eile ER WIDE sil y cg ge R JU7 6 JU3 JU6 gee cat 5 Fr e Juts e el ele sure NOTE Terminal Block 1 Terminal 1 is on the RIGHT Terminal Block 2 Terminal 1 is on the LEFT Section 2 2 9 Edition 3 Rev G 2 3 5 RTD CONNECTIONS Note Up to four Input Boards may be present stacked 4 high Input Board 1 is the bottom board Two versions of Input Board s may be found see Figure 2 8 and Figure 2 8A Input Board 1 is used for Input 1 and if equipped Input 2 Input Board 2 is used for Input 3 and Input 4 if equipped Input Board 3 is for Input 5 and Input 6 Input Board 4 is for Input 7 and Input 8 Connect 2 wire RTD inputs to terminals 3 and 4 on the Input Board s to be RTD Install a jumper between terminals 2 and 3 Terminal block
59. linear square root and exponential If EXP is selected the next parameter will be the exponential value WHEN DISPLAYED System Prompts Configuration Operator Inputs Page 4 84 Parameter that specifies when an Operator Input is displayed ALWAYS or WHEN ENABLED If the WHEN ENABLED choice is selected that Operator Input is not shown when OPERATOR INPUTS is DIS ABLED in ENABLES amp PASSWORDS Zone The portion of the chart over which a trend line is to be recorded The zone may be less than the maximum area available for recording Trends can be recorded in two adjacent zones to allow for higher resolution on one end of the recorded span Zones are established with respect to the number of rings or divisions on the chart typically 70 100 or 120 rings or divisions Division O is the inner ring ZONE 1 HIGH System Prompts Configuration Recorders Page 4 47 Parameter that specifies the DIVISION or ring corresponding to the top end of the zone This parameter also specifies the bottom of zone 2 if two zones are used Edition 3 C 14 Appendix C Rev G ZONE 1 LOW System Prompts Configuration Recorders Page 4 47 Parameter that specifies the DIVISION or ring corresponding to the bottom end of the zone For reverse ranges lower engineering value at the outer portion either the two ZONE parameters or the two SPAN parameters can be reversed ZONE 2 HIGH System Prompts Configuration Recorders Page 4 49
60. parameter VmA CONVERSION IVx V mA CONVERSION LINEAR Press ve idc change then 8 desired choice then or press the key directly below the desired choice Selections LINEAR SQRT EXP Section 4 4 7 Edition 3 Rev G Oo C Uz 14 Press D to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY UNITS IVx DISPLAY UNITS F Press the a change then desired choice then Or press the key directly below the desired choice Selections C F OTHER 15 If DISPLAY UNITS selected was OTHER press the to advance to the next parameter OTHER UNITS IVx OTHER UNITS F Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for instructions Selection Text 16 Press to advance to the next parameter DECIMAL POSITION IVx DECIMAL POSITION 0 Press change then to desired number then press i Edition 3 4 8 Section 4 Rev G Selections 0104 17 If INPUT TYPE RANGE selected was not SWITCH CONTACT press MI to advance to the next parameter RANGE LIMIT LOW IVx RANGE LIMIT LOW Units correspond to units configured in step 0 units 13 or 14 Press the change then ge Selections 999999 desired value 8 decimal position 0 9 9999 decimal position 4 then press 02 18 If INPUT TYPE RANGE selected was not SWITCH CONTACT press the to advance to the next parameter RANGE LIMIT HIGH IVx RANGE LIMIT HIGH e
61. parameter PxxSy SETPOINT 4 if setpoints 4 Press the MOD key to change then UP DOWN to desired setpoint value then press the ENTER key 10 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter PxxSy EVENT OUTPUTS during the ramp Eight digits will be displayed one for each event 0 inactive 1 active To change press the MOD key a cursor appears under the left most digit Use the UP DOWN key to change the state as necessary then the ENTER The cursor will move one position to the right Repeat this procedure for each event 11 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter PxxSy DWELL TIME displayed as hhh mm ss where h is hours mis minutes and s is seconds Press the MOD key to change Changes are made the same as for Ramp Time 12 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter PxxSy EVENT OUTPUTS during the dwell To change press the MOD key AFTER THE SEGMENT DATA IS ENTERED THE FOLLOWING ARE DISPLAYED FOR THE PROFILE Edition 3 RevG 13 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter Pxx GUARANTEED SOAK Selections NO or YES Press the MOD key to change then press the key directly below choice to enter Guaranteed Soak If selected this feature advances the soak time only when the process value is within the specified deviation from setpoint Therefore it guarantees that the load is soaked at the specified setpoint Deviation after ramp up and deviation after ramp down provides separate dev
62. press Selections 110100 Edition 3 13 6 Section 13 RevG 9 Press the to advance to the next parameter OUTPUT 2 PERCENT UPPER LIMIT only seen if OUT 2 TYPE is PID Cx OUT 2 PERCENT Press the change then n UPPER LIMIT 10075 to desired choice then press Selections 110100 10 Press the to advance to the next parameter OUTPUT 1 PERCENT ON ERROR only seen if OUT 1 TYPE is PID Cx OUT 1 PERCENT Press the change then n ON ERROR to desired choice then press ved Selections 110100 11 Press the to advance to the next parameter OUTPUT 2 PERCENT ON ERROR only seen if OUT 2 TYPE is PID Cx OUT 2 PERCENT Press the 2a change then n ON ERROR to desired choice then press the Selections 110100 Section 13 13 7 3 RevG 12 Press the to advance to the next parameter OUTPUT SLEW RATE only available with PID Cx OUTPUT SLEW RATE Press the 2a change then QQ 0 MIN to desired choice then press Selections 0 to10096 0 OFF SLEW RATE allows the control to slowly ramp the output to avoid a rapid start up Abrupt changes may set the outputs to 0 If the slew rate is programmed to 60 MIN the rate of change would be 1 second Edition 3 13 8 Section 13 Rev G 13 Press the 2 advance to the next parameter MANUAL ACTUATOR only if either output is proportional Cx MANUAL ACTUATOR 1 Selections NONEJOFE Press the 2a change then 4 a
63. section be completely filled in Parameter selections and data entry are made via the keypad To ease configuration and operation user entered data has been divided up into three sections referred to as Main Prompts The three are System Display and Chart Each prompt contains different type of data chart for the chart Display for the Display and System as follows CONFIGURATION ACTION TIME SETTINGS ALARM SETTINGS ENABLES PASSWORDS TEST CALIBRATION MODEL REV Edition 3 3 4 Section 3 Rev G ACTION TIME Selections made in action time settings are used to generate actuators that are true false SETTINGS based on times and or dates ALARM SETTING Selections made in alarm settings determine the setpoint of each alarm configured ENABLES Selections made in enables passwords provide means of enabling or disabling certain PASSWORDS prompts or selections AND provides additional security with the use of 6 digit passwords restricting access to Chart Display Enables Passwords and MAIN Prompts selections CONFIGURATION Selections made in configuration set up the instrument for proper operation TEST Routines used to test the relays and chart CALIBRATION Routines used to calibrate the instrument MODEL REV Deciphered to determine whether certain prompts or sections are shown displayed and revision of the software 3 7 DISPLAY DETAILS The instrument will spend most of the time in Normal Display When in Normal Display it can provid
64. shipped from the factory with these jumpers configured as follows JU1 IF FITTED UPSCALE BREAK JU2 Non Contact Closure Input JU3 T C mV 0 1V Switch mA JU4 IF FITTED UPSCALE BREAK JU5 Non Contact Closure Input JU6 T C mV 0 1V Switch mA JU7 WIDE SPAN JU8 WIDE SPAN JU11 IF FITTED Non RTD JU12 IF FITTED Non RTD JU15 Non mA JU16 Non mA There are 2 additional jumpers per Input Board that are used for ID These must be positioned as shown in Table 2 1 below as per their location inside the instrument Board 1 is the bottom board TABLE 2 1 BOARD ID JUMPERS Inputs Inputs 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8 Board Position JU13 JU14 Board 1 Board 2 ele Board 3 Board 4 e If any board is removed from the instrument in a multiple stack of boards it MUST BE installed in the correct sequence or these jumpers MUST BE moved If not installed correctly calibration will be affected 2 3 2 SENSOR BREAK and OUT OF RANGE DETECTION Sensor break and out of range conditions are determined and handled by the software When either occurs the software will drive the input value to 99999 or 99999 based upon whether SENSOR BREAK is software config ured for UPSCALE or DOWN SCALE in Input Configuration Any outputs will react accordingly Out of range is defined as being more than 5 out of the span established by RANGE LIMIT LOW and RANGE LIMIT HIGH For 5 or 10 Volt and Current inputs the analog signal goes to zero when there is a sensor
65. step 3 If selection was YES Rs COPY FROM RECRDER 0 INITIALIZE X Press the to change to the recorder Recorder to be copied from 0 FACTORY DEFAULT number to be copied from Qo JI m O JI O com I 3 Press the advance to the next parameter RECORDER TAG Rx RECORDER TAG Selections Text Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for instructions Edition 3 4 46 Section 4 RevG 4 Press the OR advance to the next parameter VALUE TO RECORD Rx VALUE TO RECORD NONE USED Press change then Ol Selections NONE USED to desired choice then press IV1 IV2 IV3 V4 IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8 PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4 DVi ihe DV4 DV5 DV6 DV7 DV8 DV9 DV10 DVt1 DV12 Aaditional selections for use with controller option CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4 SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12 TOTAL TOTAL2 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22 TOTALS OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32 SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4 OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42 If NONE USED was selected no other prompts for Recorder X will be seen Refer back to step 1 page 4 43 5 Press the advance to the next parameter PEN COLOR Rx PEN COLOR see note S Bie Press the a change then to GREEN RED desired choice then press the BLACK VIOLET NOTE Default for Pen varies with Recorder Number Pen 1 Red Pen 2 Green Pen 3 Blue and Pen 4 Black or Violet depending on color spec
66. step 5 above to choose your selections Section 4 4 17 Edition 3 Rev G Repeat this step for each POINT PAIR prompt for mm equal to 03 through 21 or less 7 Press the and the display advances to the next custom curve to be programmed Refer to the begin ning of this section page 4 15 4 1 4 DERIVED VARIABLES Derived Variables utilize math to DERIVE a value from other variables and or constants Derived Variables are available only if MATH was specified and present in the model number order matrix From the Normal Display press the until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line If PASS WORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to Configu ration is allowed If CONFIGURATION is not displayed then Configuration has been disabled Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Configuration With CONFIGURATION in the display press 2 then ine f until DERIVED VARIABLES appears in the lower display line 1 Press the to display DV NUMBER DV NUMBER D R V z D V A R L S Press I to change then ga desired number then press the Selections 1 to 12 Edition 3 4 18 Section 4 RevG 2 Press the to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY TAG DVxx DISPLAY TAG DER VAL x Selections Character Selection Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for instructions
67. the process variable reaches setpoint while in manual mode this parameter when selected allows the controller to revert to OFF automatic mode without operator intervention Selections OFF ON Press the 2a change then or to desired choice then press ved 15 Press the to advance to the next parameter MAIN SETPOINT SOURCE NOTE Whatever value is selected as the source of the setpoint the decimal position and the units type follow what was configured in SPx Process Variables NONE USED IV1 V2 IV3 IV4 Press the 2a change then IV5 IV6 IV7 1 8 PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4 DV2 DV3 8 desired choice then press v ag DV4 DV5 DV6 DV DV8 DV9 DV10 DVi1 DV12 CV1 CV2 CV4 CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8 CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12 TOTAL1 TOTAL2 TOTAL3 TOTAL 4 5 1 5 2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 22 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT 32 OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT 42 SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4 Cx MAIN SP SOURCE Edition 3 13 10 Section 13 RevG 16 Press the to advance to the next parameter REMOTE SETPOINT ACTUATOR Cx REMOTE SP ACTUATR CAxF5 Press the to change th ress the change then ON CONTINUOUS 7 ANY PROCESS ALARM 11 A12 A13 A14 to desired choice then press the 564 21 22 23 24 A31 A32 A33 4 A41 42 M3 44 INSTRUMENT ALARM CHART FULL OPINP 1 OPINP2 OPINP3 OPINP4 OPINP5 OPINP6 OPINP7 OPINP8 OPINP9 OPINP 10 OPINP 11 OP INP 12 CHART CHANGED CHART ROTATI
68. then TEMPR 1 not TEMPF If INPUT 4 is NOT USED then COMP 1 If INPUT 5 is NOT USED then C 1 4 28 NOTES DP Differential Pressure PRES Static Pressure must be ABSOLUTE TEMPF Flow Temperature must be degrees F COMP Compressibility Correction C Scaling Constant This function converts TEMP from degrees F to degrees R in the equation 7 RELATIVE HUMIDITY INPUT 1 DBT PROMPT DVxx DRY BULB TEMP F INPUT 2 WBT PROMPT DVxx WET BULB INPUT 3 BARO PROMPT DVxx BARO PRES Hg ACTUATOR n a RESET n a OUTPUT RELATIVE HUMIDITY in PERCENT 0 to 100 typ If INPUT 3 is NOT USED then BARO 29 921 NOTES DBT DRY BULB TEMPERATURE must be in degrees F WBT WET BULB TEMPERATURE must be in degrees F BARO ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE must be in Hg inches of Mercury 8 Fo VALUE STERILIZATION CONSTANT Fo INPUT 1 INTEMP PROMPT DVxx INPUT TEMP INPUT 2 STEMP PROMPT DVxx STERILIZE TEMP INPUT 3 2 PROMPT DVxx Z VALUE ACTUATOR RESET YES PROMPT DVxx RESET ACTUATOR OUTPUT DV 10 A 60 where A INTEMP STEMP 2 DV is the previous result NOTES INTEMP Input Temperature STEMP Sterilizing Temperature Z Z Value The TEMPERATURE can be degrees F or C but the Z value must take this into account Whenever RESET is active DV will be set to zero The units of the resultant DV is MINUTES This function is calculated once a second 9 ZRO2 ZIRCONIA OXYGEN SENSOR INPUT 1 PP PRO
69. 0 00 on the milliamp meter Depress to enter the new value or to return to previous value Depressing either ENTER or ESC exits the calibration 11 6 SOLENOID CALIBRATION CONSULT FACTORY This adjustment is made with an oscilloscope and a 10 ohm resistor It should not have to be readjusted unless the setting has been changed inadvertently 11 7 CALIBRATION DEFAULTS This routine will invoke a set of predetermined calibration values that are intended to emulate a design center condition In other words the calibration values used would be the values derived for a unit whose critical compo nents would be equal to the nominal values These default values should be used only 1 When it is known that the current calibration values are inaccurate and not acceptable and quick action is needed to restore the recorder to some basic level of operation 2 To initially calibrate a brand new input board never before calibrated as a starting point in the calibration process This is the procedure initially used to test the boards on start up at the factory Edition 3 11 8 Section 11 RevG Step 1 With CALIBRATION DEFAULTS in the lower display line depress the SET CAL DEFAULTS appears in the upper display line and NO appears in the lower display line Step 2 Depress and then select YES then depress a ENTER Section 11 11 9 Edition 3 Rev SECTION 13 CONTROLLERS When the instrument is specified with the Controller optio
70. 00385 DIN PT 100 00392 USA to desired choice then press the i PT 100 00392 SAMA 02 NI 100 Press the to advance to step 5C 5C If TC or RTD was selected then press the to advance to the next parameter DEGREES C F IVx DEGREES C F F Press the to change then or to desired choice then the or press the ENTER Special key directly below Selections C F the desired choice Edition 3 4 4 Section 4 RevG 6 Press the s advance to the next parameter SENSOR BREAK IVx SENSOR BREAK UPSCALE Press change then Selections UPSCALE DOWNSCALE to desired choice then press the ENTER Press the to advance through the next six prompts They are six jumper position prompts non changeable and are displayed for information verification only The jumper positions are based upon whether the input number is odd even input type and span Refer to Section 2 3 2 through 2 3 6 FOR INPUT NUMBER 1 3 5 7 FOR INPUT NUMBER 2 4 6 8 JU7 position JU8 position JU3 position JU6 position JU1 position JU4 position JU15 position JU16 position JU11 position JU12 position JU2 position JU5 position 7 If INPUT TYPE RANGE selected was mA mV or VOLT press the to advance to the next parameter INPUT RANGE LOW Units correspond to units IVx INPUT RANGE LOW configured in INPUT TYPE RANGE mA mV 000 units or VOLT Press the to change then or Selections 999
71. 02 0 013 Nickel Section 1 ACCURACY TABLES CONT See Note 1 3 4 5 6 INPUT SPAN REF FACTORY REF LIN DEVIATION RESOL TYPE ACC Y CAL CAL ACC Y mV uV uV uV uV C bit 10V 0 10000 2500 1000 3500 1000 381 1V 0 1000 250 100 350 100 0 38 1 100mV 0 100 25 20 45 10 0 3 81 25mV 0 25 6 20 26 2 5 0 954 See Note 1 3 4 5 6 INPUT SPAN REF FACTORY REF CAL DEVIATION RESOL TYPE ACC Y CAL ACC Y mA uA uA uA uA C uA bit mA 4 20 5 2 7 2 0 0 763 0 20 5 2 7 2 0 0 763 NOTES The table attempts to show the effect of each significant factor which contributes to the overall measurement error See the enumerated items below for more specific explanations of each column of data 1 Reference Acc y based on 0 025 250ppm of input voltage span 2 Linearization Acc y is based on conformance to NIST Monograph 175 based on the ITS 90 for letter designated thermocouple types or other industry standards for non letter designated type TCs and all RTDs 3 Factory Cal is defined by limits of repeatability in a manufacturing environment per the table for zero and span calibrations and 0 15 for thermocouple cold junction calibrations 4 The REF LIN CAL column represents the total static error allowed for an instrument as produced by the manufacturing process 5 Deviation Acc y is derived from a temperature coefficient of 0 01 C or 100ppm C expressed in units of the correspondi
72. 1 IV2 IV3 IV4 IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8 PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4 DVI DV3 prese ule DV4 DV5 DV6 DV7 DV8 DV9 DV10 DV11 DV12 Additional selections for use with controller option CV1 CV2 CV4 SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12 TOTAL TOTAL2 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22 TOTALS TOTAL4 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32 SV1 SV2 SV8 SV4 OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42 5 T L Z R S If NONE USED was selected no other prompts for Totalizer X will be seen Refer back to step 1 page 4 52 5 Press tne 5 to advance to the next parameter TIME BASE Tx TIME BASE PER SEC PERSEC PERMIN Press the to change then PERHOUR PER DAY as required to desired choice then press the Edition 3 4 56 Section 4 Rev G 6 Press the to advance to the next parameter TOTAL IS FLOW Tx TOTAL IS FLOW TIMES Selections Press the to change then to TIMES 1 000 000 desired choice then press the 100 000 10 000 TIMES 1 000 100 10 TIMES 1 0 1 0 01 TIMES 0 001 TIMES 0 0001 ie L Z 3 R S 7 Press 8 to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY OPTION Tx DISPLAY UNITS GAL Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for Text instructions 8 Press tne f to advance to the next parameter DECIMAL POSITION Tx DECIMAL POSITION Press the to change then to Sele
73. 1 Span 1 High 50 20 GPM R1 Scale Interval 10 Divisions Appendix D D 1 Edition 3 Rev G EXAMPLE 2 Application User would like to combine logically 3 alarms to create an AND situation Configuration Derived Actuators Derived Actuator 1 DA1 Item 1 A11 Alarm 1 Process Value 1 Active DA1 Item 2 AND DA1 Item 3 A12 Alarm 2 Process Value 1 Active DA1 Item 4 AND DA1 Item 5 A13 Alarm 3 Process Value 1 Active DA1 Item 6 END If Alarm 1 on Process Value 1 is Active AND Alarm 2 on Process Value 1 is Active AND Alarm 3 on Process Value 1 is Active THEN DA1 Derived Actuator 1 will be TRUE EXAMPLE 3 Operator Inputs Operator Inputs are prompts the end user may program into the instrument that allow these prompts to turn on or off actuators that control some other function within the instrument Application A user would like to turn an exhaust fan on or off as required by an operator via the keypad Configuration Operator Inputs Operator Input 1 Prompt Text EXHAUST FAN OI Off No 0 Choice FAN OFF On Yes 1 Choice FAN ON Ol1 Actuation Style CONTINUOUS Power Up State SAME Ol1 When Displayed ALWAYS To complete configuring configure Relay X Actuator OP INP 1 and connect Relay X to the exhaust fan Operation From the Normal Display depress the DISP key until EXHAUST FAN appears in the top display line and FAN OFF FAN ON appears in the bottom display line one of these should be blinking in
74. 3 Press MO to advance to the next parameter FUNCTION For FUNCTION descriptions refer to the end of this section Page 4 27 DVxx FUNCTION NONE D R V R L S Selections NONE ADD SUB MUL DIV AVG LIN d Press the a change then a or CONVERT F TOC as required to pick desired choice CUSTOM CURVE 2 CUSTOM CURVE 3 CUSTOM CURVE 4 POLYNOMIAL then press the LINEAR MASS FLOW DP MASS FLOW RELATIVE HUMIDITY Fo VALUE 2902 LOG 10 LOG e POWER 10 POWER e HIGH SELECT LOW SELECT HIGH PEAK LOW PEAK TRACK AND HOLD 1 OF 2 SELECTOR COVERT ACTUATOR Continue on to next page for additional steps unless NONE was selected in which case no other prompts for Derived Variables X will be seen refer back to step 1 page 4 18 Section 4 4 19 Edition 3 Rev G 4 Press ne io advance to the next parameter INPUT X X z INPUT as required DVxx INPUT X and specified by FUNCTION selection NONE USED Press the to change then or Selections NONE USED as required to pick desired choice IV1 1 2 IV3 IV4 V5 IV6 IV7 IV8 PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4 DV1 DV2 DV3 then press ve E DV4 DV5 DV6 DV7 DV8 DV9 DV10 DVi DV12 Additional selections for use with controller option CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4 SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12 TOTAL1 TOTAL2 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22 TOTAL3 TOTAL4 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32 SV1 SV2 SV4 OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42
75. 4 1 Parameters found in various sections used to specify the source of the value to be used by that functional block For example IV2 Input Value 2 may be the INPUT to PV2 Process Variable 2 That means that PV2 uses displays and alarms on the value from IV2 which could be determining the value from a thermocouple sensor INPUT CORRECTION System Prompts Configuration Inputs Page 4 11 Parameters used to specify a correction at two selected points thus providing a slope intercept correction over the entire input span The entered values specify the amount of correction at each point not the desired value INPUT RANGE HIGH System Prompts Configuration Inputs Page 4 6 Parameter to specify upper range of the analog input signal when the input is volts or current Example 100mV 5 VOLTS 20mA INPUT RANGE LOW System Prompts Configuration Inputs Page 4 5 Parameter to specify lower range of the analog input signal when the input is volts or current Example OmV 1 VOLTS 4mA Edition 3 C 6 Appendix C Rev G INPUTS System Prompts Configuration Page 4 1 Prompts section that configures how hardware inputs are processes to provide the desired engineering values decimal position and units for the sensor type and range used Other characteristics are also configured for out of range checking cutoff input correction filtering INPUT TYPE RANGE System Prompts Configuration Inputs Page 4 3 Specifies wheth
76. ATE TEXT Selections TEXT Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text for instructions Edition 3 13 28 Section 13 Rev G 19 Press the to advance to the next parameter F5 KEY USAGE CAx F5 KEY USAGE LOCAL REMOTE Selections NOT USED C1 AUTO MANUAL Press the to change then or C2 AUTO MANUAL C3 AUTO MANUAL C4 AUTO MANUAL to desired choice then press the LOCAL REMOTE SP1 SP2 CUSTOM 20 Press the to advance to the next parameter F5 LINE 1 TEXT CAx F5 LINE 1 TEXT CONTROLLER 1 Selections Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text for instructions 21 Press the to advance to the next parameter F5 OFF STATE TEXT only seen if KEY USAGE selected was CUSTOM CAx F5 OFF STATE TXT LOCAL TEXT Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text for instructions Section 13 13 29 Edition 3 Rev G 22 Press the to advance to the next parameter F5 ON STATE TEXT only seen if KEY USAGE selected was CUSTOM CAx F5 ON STATE TEXT REMOTE Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text for instructions 23 Press the and the display advances to the next Control State Access to be programmed Refer to the beginning of this section page 13 22 Edition 3 13 30 Section 13 Rev G 13 4 TUNING PARAMETERS The Tuning parameters section is where adjustments to the proportional band automatic reset integral and other parameters for proper operation of proportional controls and or first output second outpu
77. ATE on the upper display line depress the to view the current location of the inner ring zero point Use UP DOWN to position the dot accordingly use RESET to move the chart Step 4 Depress the to toggle the upper display line to read OUTER RING CALIBRATE Depress the to view the current location of the outer ring zero point Use UP DOWN to position the dot accordingly use RESET to move the chart Step 6 Depress WEM the to save calibration values 11 5 MILLIAMP OUTPUT CALIBRATION This routine is used to adjust the mA Output s for span A milliamp meter is required to perform this calibration Step 1 With mA OUTPUTS in the lower display line depress the and CAL WHICH mA OUTPUT appears in the upper display line and 1 appears in the lower display line m depress the then the to desired output number then Section 11 11 7 Edition 3 Rev Step 2 Connect the milliamp meter across the corresponding output terminals observing proper polarity terminal 1 is positive Step 3 Depress and INITIATE mA CAL appears in the upper display line and NO appears in the lower display line Depress select YES then depress e Step 4 The display should be flashing the message USE UP DN TO ADJUST OUTPUT TO 20 mA ENTER WHEN DONE Depress or and HIT UP DN OR ENTER appears in the upper display line and OUTPUT TO 20 mA appears in the lower display line Step 5 Use the as necessary to adjust the output to 2
78. B DV9 a C to desired choice then press the DV10 DV11 DV12 CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4 CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8 CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12 TOTAL1 TOTAL 2 TOTAL TOTAL 4 SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 22 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT 32 OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT 42 SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4 Edition 3 13 12 Section 13 Rev G 18 Press the to advance to the next parameter SECOND SETPOINT ACTUATOR Cx SECOND SP ACTUATR CAxF3 Selections NONE OFF ON CONTINUOUS ANY ALARM ANY PROCESS ALARM 11 A12 A13 A14 A21 A22 A23 A24 A31 A32 A33 A34 A41 M2 A43 44 INSTRUMENT ALARM CHART FULL OPINP 1 OPINP2 OPINP3 OPINP4 OPINP5 OPINP6 OPINP7 OPINP8 OPINP9 10 OPINP 11 OPINP 12 CHART CHANGED CHART ROTATION TREND DATA COLLECTION DA1 DA2 DA4 DA5 DA6 DA7 DA8 9 DA10 DA11 DA12 DA13 DA14 DA15 DA16 DA17 DA18 DA19 DA20 DA21 DA22 DA23 DA24 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 22 OUTPUT31 OUTPUT 32 OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT 42 PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO 2 TOTAL TOTAL PO 4 TIME 1 TIME DATE 1 TIME 2 TIME DATE 2 TIME 1 TO TIME 2 TIME DATE 1 TO 2 TIMER1 TIMER2 TIMER3 TIMER 4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 COMM TRIGGER 1 COMM TRIGGER 2 COMM TRIGGER 3 COMM TRIGGER 4 F1 F2 F3 F4 RESET MOD ENTER ON THE HOUR DAY OF WEEK DAY OF MONTH RELAY 1 RELAY2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 RELAY 5 RELAY 6 RELAY 7 RELAY 8 CA1F1 CATF2 CA1F3 A1F5 CA1F5 CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3 A2F5 CA2F5 1 CASF2 CA3F3 5
79. BLES CONTROLLER ONLY Section 3 3 13 Edition 3 Rev G 3 10 QUICK START PROCEDURE This procedure can be used for starting up the recorder at the very basic level of recording inputs or to quickly familiarize yourself with the basic configuration process A large number of default parameters are utilized and the default conditions are assumed Please refer to the balance of Section 4 for important details on how to get full use of the instruments capabilities To use this procedure you should have already jumper configured at least one input see Section 2 Installation and Wiring or be willing to use the factory settings of Thermocouple Wide Span and Upscale Break protection The marker pen assembly should also be installed see Section 2 for installation instructions Connect a sensor or input signal source to the primary input that matches the type of hardware configured on the input board If the input is configured as a thermocouple you can simply install a wire between the input connec tions and the unit will indicate the temperature inside the instrument To perform Quick Start you will need to configure the Input Value Recorder Pen Chart and Display Input Value Configuration Step 1 From a power up state depress the SCROLL key until CONFIGURATION shows in the lower line display the upper line display will show SELECT With CONFIGURATION in the lower line display use the DOWN key then SCROLL key to select INPUTS Pres
80. C to 1000 C 418 F to 1832 F Narrow E 250 C to 350 C 418 F to 663 F Wide N 270 C to 1300 C 441 F to 2373 F Narrow N 270 C to 700 C 441 F to 1292 F Wide G 0 C to 2300 C 32 F to 4172 F Wide 0 to 2300 C 32 F to 4172 F Wide D 0 C to 2300 C 32 F to 4172 F Wide NNM 0 C to 1400 C 32 F to 2552 F Wide PLII 0 C to 1400 C 32 F to 2552 F Narrow T 250 C to 400 C 421 F to 753 F Narrow R 200 C to 1750 C 400 F to 3128 F Narrow S 200 C to 1750 C 400 to 3182 F Narrow B 200 C to 1800 C 400 F to 3272 F Actual minimum of span is 0 C to prevent LO error condition during initial start up at room ambient Appendix B 1 3 Rev G RTD JU7 JU8 POSITION Low Low Low Low TYPE Platinum 100 ohm 00385 Din Platinum 100 Ohm 00392 USA Platinum 100 Ohm 00392 SAMA Nickel 100 Ohm OPERATING RANGE 200 C to 480 C 328 F to 896 F 100 C to 450 C 148 F to 842 F 200 C to 560 C 328 F to 1040 F 40 C to 200 C 40 F to 392 F B 2 Appendix B Edition 3 Rev G Appendix Reference Section Next to each term is the prompt section it appears in as appropriate and the applicable section or page of this manual Terms that are printed in all upper case letters appear in the instruments display or are keypad designa tions In some cases additional words are inserted for readability While many of the te
81. Certified for Canada CSA Spec 142 File E67237 CE Complies with EN 50082 1 CE Complies with EN 55011 ETL Listed Class and II Division 2 and Class III Division 1 and 2 Reference No 5604 2 1 12 Section 1 1 5 WARRANTY AND RETURN STATEMENT These products are sold by the factory under the warranties set forth in the following paragraphs Such warranties are extended only with respect to a purchase of these products as new merchandise directly from the factory or from a factory distributor representative or reseller and are extended only to the first buyer thereof who purchases them other than for the purpose of resale Warranty These products are warranted to be free from functional defects in materials and workmanship at the time the products leave the factory and to conform at that time to the specifications set forth in the relevant factory instruction manual or manuals sheet or sheets for such products for a period of two years THERE ARE NO EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE WARRANTIES HEREIN AND ABOVE SET FORTH PARTLOW MAKES NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS Limitations The factory shall not be liable for any incidental damages consequential damages special damages or any other damages costs or expenses excepting only the cost or expense of repair or replacement as described above Products must be installed and maintained i
82. DA11 DA12 DA13 DA14 DA15 DA16 DA17 DA18 DA19 DA20 DA 1 DA22 DA23 DA24 PRESET1 PRESET2 PRESET3 PRESET 4 TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2 TOTAL TOTAL PO4 TIME 1 TIME DATE 1 TIME 2 TIME DATE 2 TIME 1 TO TIME 2 TIME DATE 1 TO 2 TIMER1 TIMER 2 TIMER3 TIMER 4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 COMM TRIGGER 1 COMM TRIGGER 2 COMM TRIGGER 3 COMM TRIGGER 4 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 RESET MOD ENTER ON THE HOUR DAY OF WEEK DAY OF MONTH RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 RELAY 5 RELAY 6 RELAY 7 RELAY 8 Section 4 Press r Ed to change then as required to desired choice then press the ENTER S T R U M 5 G S Additional selections for use with controller option PUT11 OUTPUT12 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT 41 1 1 CAIF4 2 1 CA2F4 1 4 CMF1 CMF4 CA1F2 CA2F2 2 CA4F2 4 75 OUTPUT22 OUTPUT32 OUTPUT42 CAIF3 CA1F5 CA2F3 CA2F5 CA3F5 CA4F3 CA4F5 Edition 3 Rev 4 Press the to advance to the next parameter ALARMING ON ACTUATOR ALARMING ON ACTUATOR ON CONTINUOUS Selections nee m Jc ON CONTINUOUS Press the Ba change then a ANY ALARM ANY PROCESS ALARM A11 A12 A13 14 as required to desired choice then A21 A22 A23 A24 A31 A32 A33 A34 A41 A42 A43 A44 INSTRUMENT ALARM press the CHART FULL OP INP 1 OPINP2 OP INP3 OPINP4 OPINP5 OPINP6 OP 7 OPINP8 OP INP9 OPINP 10 OP INP 11 OPINP 12
83. DV2 DV4 DV5 DV6 DV7 DV8 DV9 CV1 CV2 CV4 SP1 SP2 CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12 OUTPUT 11 TOTALI TOTAL2 OUTPUT 21 TOTAL3 OUTPUT 31 SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4 OUTPUT 41 7 Press the to advance to the next parameter VALUE 2 CMxx VALUE 2 NONE USED Selections NONE USED IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4 IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8 PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4 DV1 DV2 DV3 DV4 DV5 DV6 DV7 DV8 DV9 CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12 OUTPUT 11 TOTAL1 TOTAL2 OUTPUT 21 TOTAL3 OUTPUT 31 SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4 OUTPUT 41 Section 4 4 97 Press the change then as required to desired choice then press e DV10 DV11 DV12 Additional selections for use with controller option SP3 SP4 CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 OUTPUT12 OUTPUT22 OUTPUT32 OUTPUT42 Press the a change then as required to desired choice the press the DV10 DV11 DV12 Additional selections for use with controller option CV1 CV2 CV4 SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 OUTPUT12 OUTPUT22 OUTPUT32 OUTPUT42 C H A R T M S S A G S n Edition 3 Rev G 8 Press the to advance to the next parameter VALUE 3 CMxx VALUE 3 TOTAL3 TOTAL4 OUTPUT31 OUTPUT32 SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4 OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42 Y NONE USED i Press the a change then lecti Pain as required to desired choice then IV1 V2 IV3 IV4 M IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8 PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4 DVi DV2 press 8
84. E OFF ON CONTINUOUS ANY ALARM ANY PROCESS ALARM A11 A12 A13 A14 A21 A22 A23 A24 A31 A32 A33 A34 A41 M2 M3 44 INSTRUMENT ALARM CHART FULL OPINP1 OPINP2 OPINP3 OPINP 4 OPINP5 OPINP6 OPINP7 OPINP8 OPINP9 OPINP 10 OP INP 11 OP INP 12 CHART CHANGED CHART ROTATION TREND DATA COLLECT ALT CHART SPEED DA1 DA2 DA4 DA5 DA6 DA7 DA8 DA9 DA10 DA11 DA12 DA13 DA14 DA15 DA16 DA17 DA18 DA19 DA20 DA21 DA22 DA23 DA24 PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2 TOTAL PO3 TOTAL PO4 TIME 1 TIME DATE 1 TIME2 TIME DATE 2 TIME 1 TO TIME 2 TIME DATE 1 TO2 TIMER1 TIMER2 TIMER3 TIMER4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 COMM TRIGGER 1 COMM TRIGGER 2 COMM TRIGGER 3 COMM TRIGGER 4 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 RESET MOD ENTER ON THE HOUR DAY OF WEEK DAY OF MONTH RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 RELAY 5 RELAY 6 RELAY 7 RELAY 8 then press vm 4 24 Section 4 11 Press ine to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY UNITS DVxx DISPLAY UNITS OTHER Press the a change then to E SF Oven desired choice then press the m ENTER 12 Press MI to advance to the next parameter UNITS DESCRIP only seen if OTHER was selected as DISPLAY UNITS DVxx UNITS DESCRIP Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for R V R L S instructions Selections Text 13 Press ine to advance to the next parameter DECIMAL POSITION DVxx DECIMAL POSIT Sele
85. ECT DATA ACTUATR Chart Prompts Chart Configuration Page 6 13 Parameter that specifies the actuator that controls whether data is collected Collected means that it is cap tured or retained for recording on the chart If the chart is rotating the trend data will be recorded immediately If the chart is not rotating the data will be retained until the chart begins rotating for normal recording Data can be retained for a limited time before the oldest data is discarded to make room for the newest data CONFIGURATION System Prompts Section 4 A section of the System Prompts which provides access to INPUTS PROCESS VARIABLES RECORDERS RELAYS and other sections to configure the various functions of the instrument Configure Chart See CHART CONFIGURATION CONNECT THE AVERAGES System Prompts Configuration Recorders Page 4 46 The recording method that is the same as AVERAGE VALUES but prints a line between successive averages to form a continuous trend line CONNECT THE VALUES System Prompts Configuration Recorders Page 4 46 The recording method that is the same as INSTANTANEOUS VALUES but prints a line between successive values to form a continuous trend line Appendix C C 3 Edition 3 Rev G CONSTANTS System Prompts Configuration Page 4 14 Prompt section containing parameters used as fixed values which are typically used for scaling constants in Derived Variables CONTINUOUS ACTUATION System Prompt
86. ELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 7 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 8 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL GUARANTEED SOAK SP1 DEVIATION RAMP UP SP1 DEVIATION RAMP DN SP2 DEVIATION RAMP UP SP2 DEVIATION RAMP DN SP3 DEVIATION RAMP UP SP3 DEVIATION RAMP DN SP4 DEVIATION RAMP UP SP4 DEVIATION RAMP DN SEGMENTS LOOP COUNT WHEN SEGMENTS DONE PROFILE LOOP COUNT END ACTION Parameter ABORT ACTION POWER FAIL ACTION RECOVERY TIME LIMIT RECOVERY ACTION Edition 3 14 12 Section 14 RevG PROFILE NUMBER Parameter DESCRIPTION SETPOINTS TO PROFILE NUMBER OF SEGMENTS SEGMENT 1 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 2 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 4 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 5 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL Section 14 14 13 Ed
87. ESET 3 PRESET 4 TOTALPO1 TOTAL PO2 TOTAL TOTAL PO4 TIME 1 TIME DATE 1 TIME 2 TIME DATE 2 TIME 1 TO TIME 2 TIME DATE 1 TO 2 TIMER1 TIMER2 TIMER3 TIMER 4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 COMM TRIGGER 1 Additional selections for use with controller option COMM TRIGGER 2 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12 COMM TRIGGER 3 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22 COMM TRIGGER 4 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 OUTPUT41 OUTPUT42 RESET MOD ENTER CAIF1 CATF2 CAIF3 ON THE HOUR CAIF4 CA1F5 DAY OF WEEK CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3 DAY OF MONTH CA2F4 CA2F5 RELAY 1 RELAY 2 CA3F1 CA3F2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 CA3F4 5 RELAY 5 RELAY 6 CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3 RELAY 7 RELAY 8 CA4F4 CA4F5 3 Press MIC and the display advances to the next LED to be programmed Refer to the beginning of this section page 4 64 Section 4 4 67 Edition 3 Rev G O mMm m 4 1 10 RELAYS Relays only available when specified and present in the model number order matrix From the Normal Display press the until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line If PASS WORDS appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to Con figuration is allowed If CONFIGURATION is not displayed then Configuruation has been disabled Refer to SEction 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Configuration With CONFIGURATION in the display press the then the o RELAYS appears in the lower display line 1 Press the to display RELAY NUMBER
88. F5 4 61 Edition 3 Rev T ie L Z 3 R S 16 Press tne b to advance to the next parameter PULSED OUTPUT Tx PULSED OUTPUT NO Press the to change then to Selections NO YES desired choice then press the T 0 1 A L Z R S 17 Press ne to advance to the next parameter PULSE EVERY only seen if PULSED OUTPUT select is YES Tx PULSE EVERY 1000 units Press the to change then to Selections 1to 10000 desired choice then press the ENTER Note Units are that of TOTAL 18 Press MO and the display advances to the next totalizer to be programmed Refer to the beginning of this section page 4 52 Edition 3 4 62 Section 4 Rev G 4 1 8 TIMERS Timers are seen only if the MATH option was specified and present in the model number order matrix From the Normal Display press the until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line If PASS WORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to Configu ration is allowed If CONFIGURATION is not displayed then Configuration has been disabled Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Configuration With CONFIGURATION in the display press the then tne until TIMERS appears in the lower display line 1 Press the to display TIMER NUMBER TIMER NUMBER Press the to change then to Selections 1to4 desired number th
89. G Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration INPUT Input 2 Input 3 INPUT TYPE RANGE T C TYPE RTDTYPE DEG C F SENSOR BREAK Upscale Downscale Upscale Downscale Upscale Downscale Upscale Downscale INPUT RANGE LOW INPUT RANGE HIGH PULSE RATE HIGH Pulse Sec Pulse Sec Pulse Sec COMMS ADDRESS COMMS REGISTER REGISTER TYPE V MA CONVERSION DISPLAY UNITS OTHER UNITS DECIMAL POSITION RANGE LIMIT LOW RANGE LIMIT HIGH EXPONENT CUTOFF TYPE CUTOFF VALUE INPUT CORRECT 1 Q Q Q INPUT CORRECT 2 VALUE FILTER Seconds Seconds Seconds DISPLAY OPTION OPEN 1 DESCR CLOSED 0 DESCR DISPLAY FILTER Edition 3 Rev Seconds Seconds 3 16 Seconds Section 3 Parameter DISPLAY TAG Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration INPUT Input 6 Input 7 INPUT TYPE RANGE T C TYPE T C INPUT SPAN Wide Narrow Wide Narrow Wide Narrow Wide Narrow RTD TYPE DEG C F V MA INPUT TYPE SENSOR BREAK Upscale Downscale Upscale Downscale Upscale Downscale Upscale Downscale INPUT RANGE LOW INPUT RANGE HIGH PULSE RATE HIGH Pulse Sec Pulse Sec Pulse Sec COMMS ADDRESS COMMS REGISTER REGISTER TYPE V MA CONVERSION DISPLAY UNITS OTHER
90. HART CHANGED CHART ROTATION TREND DATA COLLECT ALT CHART SPEED DA1 DA2 DA4 DAS DA6 DA7 DA8 DA9 DA10 DA11 DA12 DA13 DA14 DA15 DA16 DA17 DA18 DA19 DA20 DA21 DA22 DA23 DA24 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUTI2 OUTPUT21 OUTPUT22 OUTPUT31 OUTPUT32 OUTPUT41 OUTPUT42 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 4 TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2 TOTAL PO3 TOTAL PO4 TIME 1 TIME DATE 1 TIME 2 TIME DATE 2 TIME 1 TO TIME 2 TIME DATE 1 TO 2 TIMER1 TIMER2 TIMER3 TIMER 4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 COMM TRIGGER 1 COMM TRIGGER 2 COMM TRIGGER 3 COMM TRIGGER 4 Fi F2 F3 F4 F5 RESET MOD ENTER ON THE HOUR DAY OF WEEK DAY OF MONTH RELAY 1 RELAY 2 CA1F1 CA1F2 CAIF3 CAIF4 CA1F5 CA2F1 2 2 CA2F3 CA2F4 CA2F5 CA3F1 CASF2 CA3F4 CA3F5 CA4F1 CA4F2 4 CA4F4 CA4F5 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 RELAY 5 RELAY 6 RELAY 7 RELAY 8 Section 4 4 77 Edition 3 Rev G S T R U M S G S 6 Press the to advance to the next parameter DATE DISPLAY FORMAT DATE DISPLAY FORMAT MM DD YY Press the 2a change then as required to desired choice then press te 7 Press the to advance to the next parameter TIME DISPLAY FORMAT Selections MM DD YY DD MM YY DD MMM YY TIME DISPLAY FORMAT AM PM Press the a change then to desired choice then press the 8 Press the to advance to the next parameter CURRENT DATE Selections AM PM 24HOUR Format
91. IMER 4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 COMMTRIGGER 1 Additional selections for use with controller option C H A R T M S S A G S Section 4 COMM TRIGGER 2 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12 COMM TRIGGER 3 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22 COMM TRIGGER 4 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 OUTPUT41 OUTPUT42 RESET MOD ENTER CAIF1 CA1F2 CATF3 ON THE HOUR CA1F4 CA1F5 DAY OF WEEK CA2F1 2 2 CA2F3 DAY OF MONTH CA2F4 CA2F5 RELAY 1 RELAY 2 CA3F1 CA3F2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 4 5 RELAY 5 RELAY 6 CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3 RELAY 7 RELAY 8 CA4F4 CA4F5 4 95 Edition 3 Rev 4 Press the to advance to the next parameter PEN COLOR CMxx PEN COLOR RED Selections Press the a change then to desired choice then press the RED BLACK VIOLET Note Valid choice of color depends on number of colors specified when ordered One color Red Two colors Red Green Three colors Red Green Blue or Four colors Red Green Blue Black or Violet C H A R T M S S A G S 5 Press the to advance to the next parameter MESSAGE TEXT CMxx MESSAGE TEXT CM X Selections Character Selection Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for instructions Edition 3 4 96 Section 4 Rev G 6 Press the to advance to the next parameter VALUE 1 CMxx VALUE 1 NONE USED Selections NONE USED IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4 IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8 PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4
92. INT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL GUARANTEED SOAK SP1 DEVIATION RAMP UP SP1 DEVIATION RAMP DN SP2 DEVIATION RAMP UP SP2 DEVIATION RAMP DN SP3 DEVIATION RAMP UP SP3 DEVIATION RAMP DN SP4 DEVIATION RAMP UP SP4 DEVIATION RAMP DN SEGMENTS LOOP COUNT WHEN SEGMENTS DONE PROFILE LOOP COUNT END ACTION Parameter ABORT ACTION POWER FAIL ACTION RECOVERY TIME LIMIT RECOVERY ACTION Edition 3 14 10 Section 14 RevG PROFILE NUMBER Parameter DESCRIPTION SETPOINTS TO PROFILE NUMBER OF SEGMENTS SEGMENT 1 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 2 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 3 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 4 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 5 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL Section 14 14 11 Edition 3 RevG PROFILE NUMBER SEGMENT 6 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DW
93. ME 1 10 PM TIME 2 6 AM 8 HOURS from 10 pm through midnight to 6 am From the Normal Display press MO until ACTION TIME SETTINGS appears in the lower display line If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to Action Time Settings is allowed If ACTION TIME SETTINGS is not displayed then Action Time Settings has been disabled Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Action Time Settings Note Each time and date is actually comprised of two or three values or choices which all must be changed entered if any one of the parts must be changed For example to change a time from 9 00 PM to 9 15 PM press MOD then ENTER since no change is needed to 9 change 00 to 15 and then press ENTER then press ENTER again to leave PM as itis 1 Press the to display TIME 1 TAG TIME 1 TAG START TIME Selections Text Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for instructions Section 8 8 1 Edition 3 Rev G 2 Press the to advance to the next parameter TIME 1 TIME 1 format 06 00 AM Press ine Ed change then ENTRY PER to desired value then press TIME FORMAT SELECTED IN INSTRUMENT SETTINGS CONFIGURATION the Change and enter each portion of the time 3 Press the to advance to the next parameter DATE 1 DATE 1 format XX XX XX FORMAT AND Will read current date ENTRY
94. ME DATE 2 TIME 1 TO TIME 2 TIME DATE 1 TO 2 TIMER 1 TIMER2 TIMER3 TIMER 4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 Press the a change then as required to desired choice then press he D R V 3 D A C T U A T ie R S COMM TRIGGER 1 Additional selections for use with controller option COMM TRIGGER 2 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12 COMM TRIGGER 3 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22 COMM TRIGGER 4 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 OUTPUT41 OUTPUT42 RESET MOD ENTER CA1F1 1 2 CAIF3 EL 1 4 CA1F5 CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3 DAY OF WEEK CA2F4 CA2F5 RELAY 1 RELAY 2 CA3F1 CA3F2 RELAY3 RELAY4 4 5 RELAY5 RELAY6 CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3 RELAY 7 RELAY 8 CA4F4 CA4F5 Repeat the ITEM prompt as needed to configure the items necessary to form the desired logic equation Edition 3 4 84 Section 4 Rev G 4 Press the and the display advances to the next derived actuator to be programmed Refer to the beginning of this section page 4 80 4 1 14 OPERATOR INPUTS Operator Inputs are prompts programmed that allow these prompts to turn on or off actuators that control some other function within the instrument From the Normal Display press the until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line If PASS WORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to Configu ration is allowed If CONFIGURATION is not displayed then Configuration has been disabled Refer to Sec
95. MINUTES Selections n D 0 to 100 00 Press the to change then D 0 to desired number then press the 13 Press the 8 advance to the next parameter OUTPUT 2 RATE only if output 2 is proportional Cx OUT 2 RATE 0 00 MINUTES Press the to change then or to desired number then press ne RATE attempts to anticipate rapid changes system response and compensates before overshoot occurs Rate can be applied at anytime unlike auto reset which occurs within the integration band The value is defined in minutes 14 Press the and the display advances to the next controller to be tuned Refer to the beginning of this section page 13 31 Section 13 13 37 Edition 3 Rev G SECTION 14 PROFILERS The profiling capability basically consists of a functional block that modifies the setpoint s and event outputs over time The setpoint profiling is linked to the first four setpoints and the four process values Event outputs are merely actuators that can be used for any purpose but typically drive relay outputs The Profile Settings section included in CONFIGURATION is used to specify some basic profile configuration data that applies to every profile The Profile Entry section accessed via the SCROLL key is used to enter profile data ramp and dwell times setpoints event outputs and other associated data A Profile Control section accessed via the DISP key provides the means to initiate abort a profile chan
96. MPT DVxx PARTIAL PRES INPUT 2 EMF PROMPT DVxx PROBE EMF mV INPUT 3 TEMP PROMPT DVxx PROBE TEMP C ACTUATOR RESET n a OUTPUT PP 10 B where B EMF 0 0496 TEMP 273 18 NOTES PP Partial Pressure must be in Percent EMF Probe EMF must be Millivolts TEMP Probe Temperature must be degrees C This function coverts TEMP from degrees C to degrees K in the equation Section 4 4 29 Edition 3 Rev G 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Edition 3 Rev G HIGH SELECT and LOW SELECT INPUT 1 INPUT 2 ACTUATOR RESET OUTPUT HIGH PEAK INPUT 1 ACTUATOR RESET OUTPUT LOW PEAK INPUT 1 ACTUATOR RESET OUTPUT A PROMPT DVxx INPUT A B PROMPT DVxx INPUT B n a n a HIGHER of Aand B for HIGH SELECT LOWER of AandB for LOW SELECT A PROMPT DVXX INPUT n a YES PROMPT DVxx RESET ACTUATOR HIGHEST VALUE of A since last RESET Whenever RESET is active the HIGHEST VALUE will be the current value of A A PROMPT DVxx INPUT n a YES PROMPT DVXX RESET ACTUATOR LOWEST VALUE of A since last RESET Whenever RESET is active the LOWEST VALUE will be the current value of A TRACK AND HOLD INPUT 1 ACTUATOR RESET OUTPUT A PROMPT DVxx INPUT YES PROMPT DVxx TRACK ACTUATOR n a Current value of A if the state of the Selected Actuator is true Last value of A when the state of the Selected Actuator changed from true to false 1 of 2 SELECTOR INPUT 1 A PROM
97. NT OUTPUTS Only seen if current outputs has been specified and present in the model number order matrix From the Normal Display press the until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line If PASS WORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to Configu ration is allowed If CONFIGURATION is not displayed then Configuration has been disabled Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Configuration With CONFIGURATION in the display press the then the until CURRENT OUTPUTS appears in the lower display line 1 Press the to display CURRENT OUTPUT CURRENT OUTPUT Press the to change then to Selections desired number then press the 1104 ENTER 2 Press the to advance to the next parameter SOURCE COx SOURCE NONE USED Selections NONE USED IV1 1V2 IV3 IV4 IV5 IV6 1 7 IV8 PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4 DVi DV3 press the mm DV4 DV5 DV6 DV7 DV8 DV9 DV10 DVi1 DV12 Additional selections for use with controller option CV1 CV2 CV4 SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12 TOTAL TOTAL2 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22 TOTALS OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32 5 1 SV2 SV3 SV4 OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42 Press ino Cad to change then as required to desired choice then C U R R z N T 0 U T P U T S If NONE USED was selected no other prompts for CU
98. ODS parameter in the CHART CONFIGURATION prompts section and is one less than the number of periods selected Section 3 3 7 Edition 3 Rev G Trends can be zoned into two different areas to allow for higher resolution on one end of the recorded span The recorded area used on the chart for a trend may not necessarily use the entire area available for recording Engineering unit values are printed next to the corresponding scale lines The ZONE 1 LOW DIVISION param eter in RECORDERS section of CONFIGURATION specifies the position on the chart corresponding to the bottom of zone 1 and the ZONE 1 HIGH DIVISION parameter specifies the position on the chart corresponding to the top of zone 1 and the bottom of zone 2 if zone 2 is used The ZONE 2 HIGH DIVISION parameter specifies the position on the chart corresponding to the top of zone 2 with zero specifying that zone 2 is not used The SPAN 1 LOW parameter specifies the value corresponding to the bottom of zone 1 and SPAN 1 HIGH parameter specifies the value corresponding to the top of zone 1 and bottom of zone 2 if used The SPAN 2 HIGH parameter specifies the value corresponding to the top of zone 2 If the zone 2 parameter is zero zone 2 is inactive or not used The DIVISION parameters specify location relative to the CHART DIVISIONS parameter or number of chart rings which corresponds to the usable recording span of the chart The SCALE INTERVAL parameters specify the number of divisions
99. OFF VALUE may be positive or negative allowing cutoff to occur at any point Appendix C C 1 Edition 3 Rev G AVERAGE VALUES System Prompts Configuration Recorders Page 4 46 The choice for the parameter RECORDING METHOD that prints a single dot corresponding to the average of the trended value during the print interval This method records a series of dots which may not form a continuous trend line BACKGROUND System Prompts Configuration Operator Messages Page 4 88 Achoice for the parameter DISPLAY MODE It specifies that the message does not override the display of values but is included in the Display Sequence in both the Continuous and Sequential Display modes like any other display or value BLANK MAJOR PERIODS Chart Prompts Chart Configuration Page 6 5 Parameters that specifies the number of major time lines to print between sets of scales or said another way the number of major time divisions to leave between sets of major time divisions which include scales This is used to reduce the clutter on the chart if every time line included a scale line and the scale values For example if three trend lines are being recorded on a 24 hour chart setting BLANK MAJOR LINES to 5 would yield a completed chart with 3 sets of scales 3 time lines scale lines and scale values in each set evenly spaced around the chart with 5 major time lines between each set of scales CALIBRATION System Prompts Section 11 Promp
100. ON TREND DATA COLLECTION DA1 DA2 DA4 DAS DA6 DA7 DA8 DA9 DA10 DA11 DA12 DA13 DA14 DA15 DA16 DA17 DA18 DA19 DA20 DA21 DA22 DA23 DA24 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12 OUTPUT21 OUTPUT 22 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT 32 OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT 42 PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO 2 TOTAL TOTAL PO 4 TIME 1 TIME DATE 1 TIME 2 TIME DATE 2 TIME 1 TO TIME 2 TIME DATE 1 TO 2 TIMER1 TIMER 2 TIMER TIMER 4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 COMM TRIGGER 1 COMM TRIGGER 2 COMM TRIGGER 3 COMM TRIGGER 4 DAY OF WEEK DAY OF MONTH RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 RELAY 5 RELAY 6 RELAY 7 RELAY 8 CA1F1 CA1F2 CAIF3 CA1F5 CA1F5 CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3 CA2F5 CA2F5 1 CA3F2 5 CA3F5 4 1 CA4F2 CA4F3 CA4F5 CA4F5 CASF1 CA5F2 5 CA5F5 5 5 Remote Actuator selects the actuator when true switches the instrument to the REMOTE SETPOINT mode of control and when false switches back to LOCAL SETPOINT mode Section 13 13 11 Edition 3 RevG 17 Press the to advance to the next parameter REMOTE SETPOINT SOURCE only if REMOTE SP ACTUATOR is not NONE OFF Cx REMOTE SP SOURCE NOTE Whatever value is selected as the source of the setpoint the decimal position and the units type follow what was configured in NONE USED Process Variables Selections NONE USED IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4 5 IV6 IV7 IV8 Press the m to change then v PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4 DVi DV2 DV3 DV4 DV5 DV6 i i DV7 DV
101. OPY INITIALIZE Cx COPY INITIALIZE NO Selections YES or NO Press the to change then or If selection is NO see Step 3 to desired selection then press E If selection is YES Cx COPY FROM CONTRLR O INITIALIZE X Input to be copied from O FACTORY DEFAULT Press the D 0 to change to the control number to be copied from 3 Press the to advance to the next parameter CONTROL TYPE Cx CONTROL TYPE STANDARD rie TANDARD CASCADE Press the 2a change then 8 FEEDFORWARD to desired choice then press the 3 13 4 Section 13 Rev G CASCADE control uses two control blocks The output of one controller is the setpoint of a second controller Ratio and bias see Steps 20 amp 21 need to be applied to the connecting setpoint Because of the interaction between controllers cascade control will only apply to controllers 1 and 2 or 3 and 4 used in pairs with 1 and 3 being the first controller FEEDFORWARD adds a 0 100 value to the PID output When feedforward is used the feedforward source Step 22 is scaled to provide a 0 100 value to work with the loop output of 0 100 Depending on the limits of the input and the scaling the FF term may be limited to less than 100 SP PID adds a term that makes the output primarily proportional to the setpoint but with PID capability added This is used primarily for flow control 4 Press the to advance to the next parameter OUTPUT 1
102. OT DISPLAYED IN CONTINUOUS MODE IN SEQUENTIAL MODE IN BOTH MODES S U L A T V A R L S 11 Press the and the display advances to the next simulated input to be pro grammed Refer to the beginning of this section page 4 95 Section 4 4 103 Edition 3 Rev G Section 5 Display Programming Selections made in the Display prompts section determine what is displayed and how it is displayed From the Normal Display press the a If the Display prompts are disabled when the DISP key is pressed DISPLAY KEY DISABLED will appear in the lower display line Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Display prompts If the Display Prompts are not disabled BUT the password is other than zero DISPLAY KEY PASSWORD will appear in the display when the DISP key is pressed If the correct password is entered DISPLAY MODE will appear in the upper display line If the incorrect password is entered INVALID PASSWORD will appear in the upper display line If the Display Prompts are not disabled AND the password is set to zero when the a is pressed DISPLAY MODE will appear in the upper display line For the prompts associated with the key the unit automatically goes into the modify mode For simplicity of operation use the Special keys below the display referred to as F1 thru F5 for making choice selections Upon selection of a new choice value the unit will again automatical
103. PROMPTS The Select System Prompts provides access to alarm settings enables passwords configuration setup test calibration etc The System Prompts section contains up to two levels For example with CONFIGURATION displayed the Down Arrow key will access the next level of prompts where INPUTS can be selected With INPUTS displayed the Down Arrow key will access the next level of prompts where the input parameters can be accessed Pressing the Up Arrow key would return to the previous level INPUTS and pressing the Up Arrow key again would return to the previous level CONFIGURATION and pressing the UP Arrow key again would return to the Normal Display mode Section 3 3 1 3 Rev G 3 3 KEYPAD FUNCTION FIGURE 3 1 10 20 40 50 60 70 a EEE 3 8 1 DISPLAY KEY DISP While in Normal Display the Display key initiates the Display Prompts and is used to step through the Display Prompts 3 3 2 CHART KEY CHART While in Normal Display the Chart key initiates the Chart Prompts and is used to step through the Chart Prompts 333 SCROLL KEY While in Normal Display the Scroll key initiates the System Prompts While in any prompt section the Scroll key advances through the choices of other prompt sections or parameters and settings at the current level The Scroll key is also used to move the cursor to the right while in Modify 3 3 4 ARROW KEYS While in Normal Display
104. PT DVxx INPUT A INPUT 2 B PROMPT DVxx INPUT B ACTUATOR YES PROMPT DVxx SELECT B ACTUAT RESET n a OUTPUT if the state of the Selected Actuator is false B if the state of the Selected Actuator is true CONVERT ACTUATOR ACTUATOR YES PROMPT DVxx ACTUATOR RESET n a OUTPUT 0 0 if the state of the Selected Actuator is false 1 0 if the state of the Selected Actuator is true CONVERTF TOC INPUT 1 A PROMPT DVxx INPUT F ACTUATOR n a RESET n a OUTPUT A 32 5 9 Section 4 4 30 17 CONVERT C TOF INPUT 1 A PROMPT DVxx INPUT C ACTUATOR n a RESET n a OUTPUT A 9 5 32 18 BTU INPUT 1 F PROMPT DVxx FLOW INPUT 2 TEMPH PROMPT DVxx HIGHER TEMP INPUT 3 TEMPL PROMPT DVxx LOWER TEMP INPUT 4 C PROMPT DVxx SCALING CONST ACTUATOR RESET n a OUTPUT C F TEMPH TEMPL If INPUT 4 is NOT USED then C 1 NOTES F Flow TEMPH Higher Temperature for Delta T TEMPL Lower Temperature for DeltaT C Scaling Constant The Temperatures can be degrees F or C but the scaling constant must take this into account 19 ADD INPUT 1 A PROMPT DVxx INPUT 1 INPUT 2 B PROMPT DVxx INPUT 2 INPUT 3 G PROMPT DVxx INPUT 3 INPUT 4 D PROMPT DVxx INPUT 4 ACTUATOR n a RESET n a OUTPUT A B C D 20 AVG INPUT 1 A PROMPT DVxx INPUT 1 INPUT 2 B PROMPT DVxx INPUT 2 INPUT 3 PROMPT DVxx INPUT 3 INPUT 4 D PROMPT DVxx INPUT 4 ACTUATOR n a RESET n a OUTPUT A B C D E Where
105. Parameter TIME 1 TAG TIME 1 DATE 1 TIME 2 TAG TIME 2 DATE 2 DAY OF WEEK ACTUATOR DAY OF MONTH ACTUATOR TIME DISPLAY OPTION Edition 3 3 44 RevG Section 3 Parameter SP RAMP RATE Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration TUNING PARAMETERS CONTROLLER 1 CONTROLLER 2 CONTROLLER 3 CONTROLLER 4 OUT 1 P BAND OUT 2 P BAND OUT 1 SHIFT OUT 2 SHIFT INTEGRATION BAND INTEGRATION SHIFT OUT 1 AUTO RESET OUT 2 AUTO RESET OUT 1 RATE OUT 2 RATE Section 3 3 45 Edition 3 Rev G Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration ENABLES amp PASSWORDS Circle your selected choice Factory setting is underlined Parameter ACTION TIME SETTINGS Disabled Enabled ALARM SETTINGS Disabled Enabled TUNING PARAMETERS Disabled Enabled SET POINT CHANGES Disabled Enabled CONFIGURATION Disabled Enabled DERIVED ACTUATORS Disabled Enabled OPERATOR INPUTS CONF Disabled Enabled OPERATOR MESSAGES Disabled Enabled CHART MESSAGES Disabled Enabled SIMULATED VARIABLES Disabled Enabled TEST Disabled Enabled CALIBRATION Disabled Enabled CHART PROMPTS Disabled Enabled CHART CONFIGURATION Disabled Enabled DISPLAY PROMPTS Disabled Enabled OPERATOR INPUTS Disabled Enabled CONTROL STATE ACCESS Disabled Enabled SYSTEM PROMPTS PASSWORD ENABLES amp PASSWORDS PASSWORD CHART PROMPTS PASSWORD DISPLAY PROMPTS PASS
106. R which is Icated in the Instru ment Settings section 14 6 Section 14 14 3 PROFILE CONTROL To enter the Profile Control section from the Normal Display press the DISP key until SELECT appears in the upper display line and PROFILE CONTROL appears in the lower display line If PROFILE CONTROL is not displayed then Profile Control has been disabled Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Profile Control 1 With PROFILE CONTROL displayed press the DOWN key and START PROFILE will be displayed Selections are PROF 1 through PROF 16 and CONTROL ON To change press the MOD key then UP DOWN as required to desired choice then press the ENTER key Start Profile The profile to start can be derived from the result of the PROFILE START actuator positive transition See PROFILE START ACTUATOR in PROFILE SETTINGS that takes the value of the PROFILE SELECTOR value or the START PROFILE NUMBER entered above Only available if profile is not already running 2 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter START DESCRIPTION This is a READ ONLY parameter Start Description Start description corresponds to the PROFILE DESCRIPTION under the PROFILE ENTRY menu for the selected profile 3 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter PROFILE START STOP Displayed in Automatic Modify Mode AMM selections are ABORT STOP or RUN START Press the key directly below the choice to enter 4 Press the
107. R FIGURE 2 8 OR 2 8A DEPENDING ON WHICH CIRCUIT BOARD IS FITTED FIGURE 2 11 FIGURE 2 11A JU15 JU16 ga JU8 JUt1 JU2 JU5 JU12 ES ele 2016 NOTE Terminal Block 1 Terminal 1 is on the RIGHT Terminal Block 2 Terminal 1 is on the LEFT Section 2 2 13 Edition 3 RevG 2 4 WIRING CONNECTIONS OUTPUTS Relay output s if provided may be assigned to any actuator which includes alarms and or optional control capability Current output s if provided may be assigned to any analog value which includes derived and process values for retransmission or control Assignment of the function is accomplished in Configuration 24 1 SPDT RELAY OUTPUT Note Up to two Boards may be present stacked 2 high Board 1 is the bottom board SPDT and or SSR driver outputs is are designated as Relay 1 through Relay 8 Relay 1 through Relay 4 are located on Board 1 and Relay 5 through Relay 8 if provided are located on Board 2 See Figure 2 4 page 2 6 Connections are made as shown Terminal connections are made using TB1 thru TB4 Relay 1 thru Relay 4 respectively FIGURE 2 12 TB1 TB2 TB3 4 2 4 2 SSR DRIVER OUTPUT Note Up to two Boards may be present stacked 2 high Board 1 is the bottom board Connections are made as shown Terminal connections are made using TB1 thru TB4 Relay 1 thru Relay 4 respectively FIGURE 2 13 TB1 TB2 TBS3 4 3 2
108. RELAY NUMBER L S amp R L A Y S Press the to change then to desired number then press the ENTER 1108 2 Press ne fb advance to the next parameter RELAY USAGE RELAY x USAGE STATE OR ON OFF STATE OR ON OFF Press the to change then to PULSED OUTPUT TIME PROPORTIONING desired choice then press the ENTER Edition 3 4 68 Section 4 Rev G 3 Press the to advance to the next parameter RELAY ACTUATOR only available if RELAY USAGE selected was STATE OR ON OFF or PULSED OUTPUT RELAY x ACTUATOR NONE OFF Selections ANY ALARM ANY PROCESS ALARM as required to desired choice then 11 12 A13 14 21 22 23 24 A31 A32 A33 A34 41 M2 M3 M4 press the INSTRUMENT ALARM ENTER CHART FULL OPINP1 OPINP2 OPINP3 OPINP4 OPINP5 OPINP 6 OPINP7 OPINP8 OPINP9 OPINP 10 OPINP 11 OP INP 12 CHART CHANGED CHART ROTATION TREND DATA COLLECT ALT CHART SPEED DA1 DA2 DA4 DA5 DA6 DA7 DA8 DA9 DA10 11 DA12 DA13 DA14 DA15 DA16 DA17 DA18 DA19 DA20 DA 1 DA22 DA23 DA24 PRESET1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2 TOTAL TOTAL PO4 TIME 1 TIME DATE 1 TIME 2 TIME DATE 2 TIME 1 TO TIME 2 TIME DATE 1 TO 2 TIMER 1 TIMER2 TIMER 3 TIMER 4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 COMM TRIGGER 1 Additional selections for use with controller option COMM TRIGGER 2 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12 COMM TRIGGER 3 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22 COMM TRIGGER 4 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32 F1 F2 F3 F4
109. RRENT OUTPUT X will be displayed refer to step 1 above Section 4 4 71 Edition 3 Rev 3 Press the to advance to the next parameter RANGE LOW Units correspond to COx RANGE LOW Units configured in corresponding CO Source parameter previously selected 0 units Press the to change then to desired value then press the ENTER Selections 999999 4 Press the to advance to the next parameter RANGE HIGH Units correspond to COx RANGE HIGH Units configured in corresponding CO 100 units Source parameter previously selected Press the to change then to desired value then press the 5 Press the to advance to the next parameter OUTPUT RANGE U R R 3 N T 0 U T P U T S Selections 999999 COx OUTPUT RANGE 4 20mA Press ne id to change then to desired choice then press the ENTER Edition 3 4 72 Section 4 Rev G 6 Press the to advance to the next parameter OUTPUT ON ERROR COx OUTPUT ON ERROR 0 mA 5 to change then to Selections 0 to 22 desired value then press the f ENTER 7 Press the and the display advances to the next current output to be programmed Refer to the begin ning of this section page 4 69 U R R T 0 U T P U T Section 4 4 73 Edition 3 Rev 4 1 12 INSTRUMENT SETTINGS Instrument Settings define instrument tag display option and date time format From the Normal Displa
110. RY REF LIN DEVIATION RESOL TYPE CAL ACC Y C bit 385 160 480 0 06 0 025 RTD 200 160 0 00 0 022 392 100 450 f f 0 05 0 025 RTD 392 200 560 0 06 0 044 SAMA 100 ohm 40 200 0 013 Nickel Edition 3 E 2 Appendix E Rev G 6 LINEAR SPAN REF FACTORY REF LIN DEVIATION RESOL RANGES ACC Y CAL CAL ACC Y V VI 10V 0 10000 2500 1000 3500 1V 0 1000 250 100 350 100mV 0 100 25 20 45 25mV 0 25 6 20 26 See Note 1 3 4 5 6 LINEAR FACTORY REF CAL DEVIATION RESOL RANGES CAL ACC Y uA uA uA bit NOTES The Table attempts to show the effect of each significant factor which contributes to the overall measure ment error See the enumerated items below for more specific explainations of each column of data 1 Reference Acc y based on 0 025 250ppm of input voltage span 2 Linearization Acc y is based on conformance to NIST Monograph 175 based on the ITS 90 for letter designated thermocouple types or other industry standards for non letter designated type T Cs and all RTDs 3 Factory Cal is defined by limits of repeatability in a manufacturing environment of 10uV for zero and span calibrations on thermocouples as stated or other inputs and 0 15 C for thermocouple cold junction calibrations 4 The REF LIN CAL column represents the total static error allowed for an instrument as produced by the manufacturing process 5 Deviation Acc y is d
111. S DV4 DV5 DV6 DV DV8 DV9 S DV10 DV11 DV12 Additional selections for use with controller option CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4 SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 A CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 G CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12 TOTALI TOTAL2 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22 9 Press the to advance to the next parameter VALUE 4 CMxx VALUE 4 NONE USED Press the change then as required to desired choice then ress the DV4 DV5 DV6 i DV7 DV8 DV9 DV10 DV11 DV12 Additional selections for use with controller option CV1 CV2 CV4 SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12 TOTALI TOTAL2 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22 TOTAL3 TOTAL4 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32 SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4 OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42 Selections NONE USED IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4 IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8 PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4 DV2 DV3 Edition 3 4 98 Section 4 Rev 10 Press the to advance to the next parameter TIME DATE STAMP CMxx TIME DATE STAMP NO Press the change then to desired choice then press the 11 Press the to advance to the next parameter CMSS ORIENTATION Selections YES NO CMxx ORIENTATION HORIZONTAL Press the e change then to desired choice then press the een ENTER Selections HORIZONTAL VERTICAL 12 Press the and the display advances to the next chart message to be programmed Refer to the beginning of this section page 4 89 4 1 17 SIMULATED VARIABLES Simulated Variables ty
112. SABLED ENABLED desired choice then press the Edition 3 9 4 Section 9 Rev G 11 Press the OK advance to the next parameter OPERATOR MESSAGES OPERATOR MESSAGES Press r Ed change then to Selections DISABLED ENABLED desired choice then press the ENTER 12 Press the to advance to the next parameter CHART MESSAGES CHART MESSAGES Press the a change then to Selections DISABLED ENABLED desired choice then press the 13 Press the to advance to the next parameter SIMULATED VARIABLES SIMULATED VARIABLES Press void change then to desired choice then press the e Selections DISABLED ENABLED Section 9 9 5 Edition 3 Rev G 14 Press the advance to the next parameter TEST Press the 2a change then to desired choice then press the ENTER 15 Press the to advance to the next parameter CALIBRATION Selections DISABLED ENABLED CALIBRATION Press the 2a change then 10 desired choice then press the e elections DISABLED ENABLED 16 Press the to advance to the next parameter CHART PROMPTS CHART PROMPTS Press the a change then to DISABLED ENABLED desired choice then press the ENTER Edition 3 9 6 Section 9 Rev G 17 Press the to advance to the next parameter CHART CONFIGURATION CHART CONFIGURATION Press the 2a change then to Selections DISABLED ENABLED desired choice t
113. SION nnn 100 Rs SPAN 2 HIGH nnnnnnnuuuuuu N A 210 F N A N A Rs SCALE 2 INTERVAL nn DIVISIONS Rs POSITION ON ERROR DIVISION nnn Section 3 3 11 Edition 3 Rev G 3 8 4 SEQUENCE OF EVENTS 11 27 PM Chart installed 11 30 PM Instrument began printing with the Chart Tag UNIT 1 and the trend data collected and saved between 11 27 and 11 30 while continuing to save scanned data Note the gt on the outer ring to indicate where trending began 11 31 PM Instrument caught up to the current time and began normal trending 11 50 PM Flow rate went into alarm 12 20 PM Flow rate came out of alarm 12 54 PM Recording interrupted by power failure 1 12 PM Recording restored marked on the chart at X XX PM to indicate point of power interruption and chart positioned to correct time and trending resumes FIGURE 3 2 unit i Edition 3 3 12 Section 3 RevG 3 9 GETTING STARTED Before attempting any configuration programming review Sections 3 3 Keypad Function 3 4 Changing Param eter Settings 3 7 Display Details 3 8 Chart Details and Appendix C Reference Section Then using the Flow Charts below the Quick Start Procedure page 3 14 and filled in the Software Reference Record Sheets determine the prompts and parameters that will be required for proper operation of the instru ment and begin the configuration and programming procedures as described in Section 4 Configuration Section 5 Display Programming
114. SPEED USED ALT SPEED ACTUATOR ALTERNATE SPEED MAJOR TIME PERIODS MINOR TIME PERIODS BLANK MAJOR PERIODS MAJOR LINE PEN COLOR MATCH SCALE COLOR SELECT A COLOR MAJOR LINE PEN COLOR IF SELECT BLUE GREEN RED BLACK VIOLET MINOR LINE PEN COLOR MATCH SCALE COLOR SELECT A COLOR MINOR LINE PEN COLOR IF SELECT BLUE GREEN RED BLACK VIOLET TIME PEN COLOR BLUE GREEN RED BLACK VIOLET DATE PEN COLOR BLUE GREEN RED BLACK VIOLET CHART TAG PEN COLOR BLUE GREEN RED BLACK VIOLET ACTION ON NEW CHART STOP AFTER 1 REVOLUTION ROTATE CHART ACTUATOR COLLECT DATAACTUATOR CHART ROTATION PROMPT TREND DATA COLLECT PROMPT CHART SPEED PROMPT Section 3 3 41 Edition 3 RevG Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration DISPLAY PROGRAMMING Parameter SEQUENTIAL DISPLAY DURATION SECONDS DISPLAY MODE CONTINUOUS SEQUENCE DISPLAY FORMAT 1 VAL 2 VALS 4 VALS Edition 3 3 42 Section 3 Rev G Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration ALARM SETTINGS PV 1 ALM 1 A11 ALM 2 A12 ALM 3 13 ALM 4 A14 SETPONT oo O PV2 ALM 1 A21 ALM 2 A22 ALM 3 A23 ALM 4 A24 ALM 1 A31 ALM 2 A32 ALM 3 A33 ALM 4 A34 seONT ooo o PV4 ALM 1 A41 ALM 2 A42 ALM 3 A43 ALM 4 A44 SETPONT o d O Section 3 3 43 Edition 3 Rev G Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration ACTION TIME SETTINGS
115. Section 4 RevG Selections 1 to 12 2 Press ne to advance to the next parameter VALUE CVx VALUE 1 00000 E 0 Press the ea change then to Selections 9 99999E37 to 9 99999E37 desired position then EB desired number then press the This will change the value number Then change the exponent right number and then press 3 Press MO and the display advances to the next constant to be programmed Refer to the beginning of this section page 4 14 4 1 3 CUSTOM CURVES Custom Curves are available only when MATH has been specified and present in the model number order matrix Custom Curves allow the user to define up to 21 point custom curve From the Normal Display press the until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line If PASS WORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to Con figuration is allowed If CONFIGURATION is not displayed then Configuration has been disabled Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Configuration With CONFIGURATION in the display press the then the until CUSTOM CURVES appears in the lower display line 0 S T A N T S amp U S T 0 M U R V S Continued on next page Section 4 4 15 Edition 3 Rev G 1 Press the to display CUSTOM CURVE NUMBER CUSTOM CURVE NUMBER Press the to change then to Selections desired number t
116. Section 6 Chart Prompts and if required Section 7 Alarm Settings and Section 8 Action Time Settings Section 9 contains procedures for Enabling Disabling and entering Passwords Appendix D may be referred to for examples of how to program configure some prompts and parameters CHART p CHART p CHANGE YES START CHART TREND CHART p gt CHART PROMPTS PASSWORD CHART CHART ROTATE COLLECT SPEED CONFIG i DISP DISP l CONTROLLER y SELECT SELECT DISP DisP SEQDISP l OPER PROMPTS P password P STATE ACCESS P seTPOINTS Bl MANUAL VALUES MODE B DURATION CONTROLLER ONLY SYSTEM SYSTEM E ACT TIME ALARM TUNING ENABLES MODE PROMPTS PASSWORD SETTINGS SETTINGS P PARAMETERS We ASSWORDS P CONFIG TEST CAL conre H inputs 9 constants CUSTOM DERIVED pe PROCESS CONTROLLERS B RECORDERS TOTALIZERS CURVES VARIABLES CURRENT INSTRUMENT TIMERS B LEDS um QUIPUTS P SETTINGS DERIVED OPERATOR pp OPERATOR CHART CONTROL STATE SIMULATED ACTUATORS INPUTS MESSAGES MESSAGES ACCESS VARIA
117. Selections NONE USED as required to pick desired choice 1 1 2 IV3 IV4 V5 IV6 IV7 IV8 PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4 DV1 DV2 DV3 then press ve E DV4 DV5 DV6 DV7 DV8 DV9 DV10 DVi DV12 Additional selections for use with controller option CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4 SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12 TOTAL1 TOTAL2 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22 TOTAL3 TOTAL4 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32 SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4 OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42 Section 4 4 2 Edition 3 Rev G 8 Press ine to advance to the next parameter INPUT X if it applies DVxx INPUT X NONE USED Press the to change then or Selections NONE USED as required to pick desired choice V1 IV2 IV3 IV4 V5 IV6 IV7 IV8 PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4 DV1 DV2 DV3 then press ve E DV4 DV5 DV6 DV7 DV8 DV9 DV10 DVi DV12 Additional selections for use with controller option CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4 SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 CV9 CV10 CVt1 CV12 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUTI2 TOTAL1 TOTAL2 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22 TOTAL3 TOTAL4 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32 SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4 OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42 D 3 R V R L S Edition 3 4 22 Section 4 Rev G 9 Press the to advance to the next parameter INPUT ACTUATOR Only seen if an actuator is required per the FUNCTION specified DVxx INPUT ACTUATOR NONE OFF Selections NONE OFF ON CONTINUOUS Press the to change then or ANY ALARM ANY PROCESS ALARM as required to pick desired choice
118. T CA1 F2 KEY USAGE CA1 F2LINE 1 TEXT CA1 F2 OFF STATE TEXT CA1 F2 ON STATE TEXT CA1 F3 KEY USAGE CA1 F3 LINE 1 TEXT CA1 OFF STATE TEXT CA1 ON STATE TEXT CA1 F4 KEY USAGE CA1 F4 LINE 1 TEXT CA1 F4 OFF STATE TEXT CA1 F4 ON STATE TEXT CA1 F5 KEY USAGE CA1 F5 LINE 1 TEXT CA1 F5 OFF STATE TEXT CA1 F5 ON STATE TEXT Edition 3 3 36 Section 3 Rev G Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration CONTROL STATE ACCESS Parameter CA2 LINE 1 TEXT CA2 LINE 2 TEXT CA2 F1 KEY USAGE CA2 F1 LINE 1 TEXT CA2 F1 OFF STATE TEXT CA2 F1 ON STATE TEXT CA2 F2 KEY USAGE CA2 F2 LINE 1 TEXT CA2 F2 OFF STATE TEXT CA2 F2 ON STATE TEXT CA2 F3 KEY USAGE CA2 F3 LINE 1 TEXT CA2 F3 OFF STATE TEXT CA2 F3 ON STATE TEXT CA2 F4 KEY USAGE CA2 F4 LINE 1 TEXT CA2 F4 OFF STATE TEXT CA2 F4 ON STATE TEXT CA2 F5 KEY USAGE CA2 F5 LINE 1 TEXT CA2 F5 OFF STATE TEXT CA2 F5 ON STATE TEXT Section 3 3 37 Edition 3 Rev G Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration CONTROL STATE ACCESS Parameter CA3 LINE 1 TEXT LINE 2 TEXT CA3 F1 KEY USAGE F1 LINE 1 TEXT CAS F1 OFF STATE TEXT CAS F1 ON STATE TEXT CAS F2 KEY USAGE CAS F2 LINE 1 TEXT CAS F2 OFF STATE TEXT CAS F2 ON STATE TEXT CAS F3 KEY USAGE CAS F3 LINE 1 TEXT CAS F3 OFF STATE TEXT CAS F3 ON STATE TEXT CAS F4 KEY USAGE
119. T 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 4 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 5 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL Section 14 PROFILE NUMBER P14 em pu Ps Pie Edition 3 Rev G PROFILE NUMBER Parameter SEGMENT 6 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 7 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 8 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL GUARANTEED SOAK SP1 DEVIATION RAMP UP SP1 DEVIATION RAMP DN SP2 DEVIATION RAMP UP SP2 DEVIATION RAMP DN SP3 DEVIATION RAMP UP SP3 DEVIATION RAMP DN SP4 DEVIATION RAMP UP SP4 DEVIATION RAMP DN SEGMENTS LOOP COUNT WHEN SEGMENTS DONE PROFILE LOOP COUNT END ACTION Parameter ABORT ACTION POWER FAIL ACTION RECOVERY TIME LIMIT RECOVERY ACTION Edition 3 14 16 Section 14 RevG Parameter PROFILE ENTRY PROF START ACTUATOR PROFILE SELECTOR PROF ABORT ACTUATOR PROF HOLD ACTUATOR PROF ADVANCE ACTUA
120. T DISPLAY TEST appears in the upper display line and NO appears in the lower display line Depress select YES then depress to perform the test n Step 2 All dots in the vacuum fluorescent display will light With each successive depression of the the display will show 2 lines of characters then all dots being lit then characters etc Step 3 m To exit the test depress lii when the lines of characters are displayed The instrument will return to the normal display Edition 3 10 2 Section 10 Rev G 10 3 KEYPAD TEST Allows the operator to verify that the keypad is functional No test equipment is required to perform this test Step 1 With KEYPAD in the lower display line depress the and INITIATE KEYPAD TEST appears in the upper display line and NO appears in the lower display line Depress select YES then depress to start the test Step 2 THE KEY PRESSED WAS appears in the upper display line and ENTER KEY appears in the lower display line With each depression of a key EXCEPT ESC the name of that key will appear in the lower display line The ESC key will exit this test Step 3 To exit this test depress the key and the instrument will return to the normal display 10 4 LED TEST Allows the operator to verify that the LEDs are functional No test equipment is required to perform this test Step 1 With LED in the lower display line depress the and INITIATE LED TEST appears in the upper display line
121. TION SUPPORT Please have your recorder model number AND serial number available before calling for technical and application support Support is available from The Partlow Corporation 2 Campion Road New Hartford NY 13413 1 800 866 6659 or 1 315 797 2222 Fax 1 315 797 0403 or 1 315 793 1864 Prefix amp Table of Contents 3 Edition 3 Rev G Table of Contents SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL INFORMATION 1 1 Unpacking 1 2 Installation of Pen Cartridge Assembly 1 3 Order Matrix Model Number 1 4 Specifications 1 5 Warranty Statement SECTION 2 INSTALLTION AND WIRING 2 1 Mounting 2 2 Preparation for Wiring 2 3 Wiring Connections Inputs 2 3 1 Shipped Configuration Jumper Positioning 2 3 2 Sensor Break 2 8 8 AC Power Connections 2 3 4 Thermocouple Connections 2 3 5 RTD Connections 2 3 6 Voltage Connections 2 3 7 Current Connections 2 3 8 Switch Input Connections 2 4 Wiring Connections Outputs 2 4 4 SPDT Relay 2 4 2 Solid State Relay Driver SSRD 2 4 3 Current Output 2 4 4 24 VDC Transmitter Power Supply 2 4 5 Communications SECTION 3 THE BASICS OF RECORDER OPERATION 3 1 Power Up 3 2 Instrument Modes 3 2 1 Normal Display 3 2 2 Display Prompts 3 2 3 Chart Prompts 3 2 4 System Prompts 3 3 Keypad Functions 3 3 4 DISPLAY key 3 3 2 CHART key 3 3 3 SCROLL key 3 3 4 ARROW keys 3 3 5 RESET key 3 3 6 ESCAPE key MODIFY key ENTER key 3 3 7 Special keys 3 4 Changing Parameter Settings Modify 3 4 4 Changi
122. TORY USE ONLY Calibrated Input Values Displays calibrated input values for inputs and grounds FACTORY USE ONLY mA Output Used to verify the mA Output is functional Section 10 QB tin 3 Rev 10 1 RELAY TEST Allows the operator to verify that the LEDs Relay and or SSRD output s is are working A Volt Ohm meter will be required to test the output Step 1 With RELAY in the lower display line depress the and INITIATE RELAY TEST appears in the upper display line and NO appears in the lower display line Depress select YES depress to perform the test Step 2 TEST IN PROCESS appears in the upper display line LED 1 will be lit and Relay 1 will be energized or SSRD 1 will be on For SPDT relays connect the meter across the NO and COM output terminals in the ohm scale The meter should read continuity with the relay on and infinitity when the relay is off For SSRD outputs connect the meter across the output terminals in the Volt DC scale The meter should read 5 VDC when the SSRD is on and 0 VDC when the SSRD is off When each depression of the advances through each available Relay and or SSRD All eight LEDs should light one after the other as all 8 are always present Step 4 To exit the test depress the 10 2 DISPLAY TEST Allows the operator to verify that all dots in the VFD are working No test equipment is required to perform this test Step 1 With DISPLAY in the lower dipslay line depress the and INI
123. TR PROF DISPLAY OPTION Section 14 DISABLED DURING RUN ENABLED DURING RUN 14 17 Edition 3 Rev G Appendix A Board Layouts FIGURE A 1 POWER SUPPLY BOARD Appendix A 1 3 Rev G FIGURE 2 MOTHER BOARD Edition 3 A 2 Appendix A Rev G FIGURE 3 RELAY SSR BOARD RELAY 4 RELAY 3 RELAY 2 RELAY 1 Appendix A A 3 Edition 3 Rev G FIGURE 4 INPUT BOARD JU13 JU14 gf fta L JU1 JU4 JU11 JU2 JU5 JU12 Edition 3 A 4 Appendix A Rev G FIGURE 5 MOTOR DRIVER BOARD DOoOoO J2 J1 Appendix A A 5 Edition 3 Rev G FIGURE 6 CURRENT OUTPUT BOARD NON ISOLATED ISOLATED Edition 3 A 6 Appendix A Rev G FIGURE 7 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY BOARD Appendix A A 7 Edition 3 Rev G FIGURE 8 COMMS BOARD TB1 232 Main TB3 485 Main TB2 232 Aux 4 485 Aux Edition 3 A 8 Appendix A Rev G Appendix Ranges THERMOCOUPLE JU7 JU8 POSITION TYPE OPERATING RANGE Wide J 200 C to 760 C 328 F to 1400 F Narrow J 200 C to 450 C 328 F to 842 F Wide K 250 C to 1370 C 418 F to 2498 F Narrow K 250 C to 600 C 418 F to 1112 F Wide E 250
124. TS NO COMMAS or DIGITS WITH COMMAS DISPLAY MODE Display Prompts Page 5 1 Parameter that specifies the CONTINUOUS or sequential SEQUENCE display mode See OM DISPLAY MODE for Operator Messages DISPLAY OPTION System Prompts Configuration Parameter that specifies the display option for the corresponding value or message The choices are NOT DISPLAYED IN CONTINUOUS MODE IN SEQUENTIAL MODE and IN BOTH MODES Display Prompts Section 5 One of the three main prompt sections accessed by the DISP key in which all display format parameters and Operator Prompts are located Display Sequence The list or series of value and message displays that appears in the Normal Display mode Appendix C C 5 Edition 3 Rev G DISPLAY TAG System Prompts Configuration Parameter used to specify a description or designation that can be displayed with the Input Value Process Variable or Derived Variable when they are included in the Display Sequence in the 1 VAL 1 value at a time Display Mode The tags do not appear in the other display modes as there is no space for them DISPLAY UNITS System Prompts Configuration Parameter that specifies the units for the corresponding value degrees C F or OTHER If OTHER is selected the next prompt will allow the user to enter up to six characters to be used or displayed as the engineering units DIVISION System Prompts Configuration Recorders Units for ZONE parameters that specify location
125. TYPE Cx OUTPUT 1 TYPE NONE OFF Press the 2a change then n ON OFF DIRECT ON OFF REVERSE PID DIRECT to desired choice then press the 33 PID REVERSE 5 Press the to advance to the next parameter OUTPUT 2 TYPE Cx OUTPUT 2 NONE OFF Selections NONE OFF Press the 6 change then or ON OFF DIRECT 4 ON OFF REVERSE PID DIRECT i i PID REVERSE to desired choice then press ne Section 13 13 5 3 Rev G 6 Press the to advance to the next parameter OUTPUT 1 HYSTERESIS only seen if OUT 1 TYPE is ON OFF Cx OUT 1 HYSTERESIS NOTE Units correspond to Units configured in Process Variables 1 3 UNITS Selections preso ne ee n Wet ress the change then 6 decimal position 0 0 to 9 9999 to desired number then press the oe Note Hysteresis centers on the control setpoint 7 Press the to advance to the next parameter OUTPUT 2 HYSTERESIS only seen if OUT 2 TYPE is ON OFF Cx OUT 2 HYSTERESIS NOTE Units correspond to ce alia in Process 3 UNITS Selections 0 to 999999 Press the ga change then n decimal position 0 0 to 9 9999 decimal position 4 to desired number then press e E Note Hysteresis centers on the control setpoint 8 Press the to advance to the next parameter OUTPUT 1 PERCENT UPPER LIMIT only seen if OUT 1 TYPE is PID Cx OUT 1 PERCENT Press the a change then Bn UPPER LIMIT 100 to desired choice then
126. This will prevail until the alarm condition returns to the inactive state whereafter the alarm will operate normally Selections NO YES 29 Press the and the display advances to the next process variable input to be programmed Refer to the beginning of this section page 4 32 Edition 3 4 44 Section 4 RevG 4 1 6 RECORDERS Recorders defines values being recorded tags method source of data and chart divisions and zoning In the Normal Display press MO until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to Configuration is allowed If CONFIGURATION is not displayed then Configuration has been disabled Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Configuration With CONFIGURATION in the display press the au then the 8 RECORDERS appears the lower display line 1 Press reiZ display RECORDER NUMBER RECORDER NUMBER Press change then to desired number then press 2 bu ENTER 2 Press the advance to the next parameter COPY INITIALIZE Rx COPY INITIALIZE NO Press change then to desired choice then press 3 ENTER Choose YES if the parameters to be programmed are the same as another RECORDER already programmed Selections NO YES Section 4 4 45 Edition 3 Rev G o JI m O JI O O mI If selection was NO proceed to
127. UATION STYLE Continuous Momentary Continuous Momentary Continuous Momentary POWER UP STATE Off On Same Off On Same Off On Same WHEN DISPLAYED Always When Enabled Always When Enabled Always When Enabled 3 33 Edition 3 Rev G Section 3 Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration OPERATOR MESSAGES Parameter ACTUATOR LINE 1 TEXT LINE 2 TEXT DISPLAY MODE Parameter ACTUATOR LINE 1 TEXT LINE 2 TEXT DISPLAY MODE Parameter ACTUATOR LINE 1 TEXT LINE 2 TEXT DISPLAY MODE Parameter ACTUATOR LINE 1 TEXT LINE 2 TEXT DISPLAY MODE Edition 3 3 34 Section 3 Rev Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration CHART MESSAGES Parameter ACTUATOR PEN COLOR MESSAGE TEXT VALUE 1 VALUE 2 VALUE 3 VALUE 4 TIME DATE STAMP ORIENTATION Parameter ACTUATOR PEN COLOR MESSAGE TEXT VALUE 1 VALUE 2 VALUE 3 VALUE 4 TIME DATE STAMP ORIENTATION Parameter ACTUATOR PEN COLOR MESSAGE TEXT VALUE 1 VALUE 2 VALUE 3 VALUE 4 TIME DATE STAMP ORIENTATION Section 3 3 35 Edition 3 Rev G Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration CONTROL STATE ACCESS Parameter CA1 LINE 1 TEXT CA1 LINE 2 TEXT CA1 F1 KEY USAGE CA1 F1 LINE 1 TEXT CA1 F1 OFF STATE TEXT CA1 F1 ON STATE TEX
128. UNITS DECIMAL POSITION RANGE LIMIT LOW RANGE LIMIT HIGH EXPONENT CUTOFF TYPE CUTOFF VALUE INPUT CORRECT 1 INPUT CORRECT 2 VALUE FILTER Seconds Seconds Seconds DISPLAY OPTION HIGH STATE DES LOW STATE DES DISPLAY FILTER Section 3 Seconds Seconds 3 17 Seconds Edition 3 Rev G Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration CONSTANTS Parameter Parameter CV 5 CV 6 CV 7 CV 8 Parameter CV 9 CV 10 CV 11 CV 12 3 3 18 Section 3 Rev Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration CUSTOM CURVES Parameter DECIMAL POSITION OF INPUT DECIMAL POSITION OF OUTPUT NUMBER OF POINTS POINT PAIR 01 POINT PAIR 02 POINT PAIR 03 POINT PAIR 04 POINT PAIR 05 POINT PAIR 06 POINT PAIR 07 POINT PAIR 08 POINT PAIR 09 POINT PAIR 10 POINT PAIR 11 POINT PAIR 12 POINT PAIR 13 POINT PAIR 14 POINT PAIR 15 POINT PAIR 16 POINT PAIR 17 POINT PAIR 18 POINT PAIR 19 POINT PAIR 20 POINT PAIR 21 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 V V V W Section 3 3 19 3 Rev G Parameter DECIMAL POSITION OF INPUT Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration CUSTOM CURVES DECIMAL
129. UR 7 DAY OTHER 5 Press the to advance to the next parameter NORMAL SPEED only seen if NORMAL SPEED selected was OTHER NORMAL SPEED 24 HRS REV Press the a change then to desired digit then ie desired value then press the Section 6 6 3 Edition 3 Rev Selection 6 to 9999 6 Press the to advance to the next parameter MAJOR TIME PERIODS MAJOR TIME PERIODS 24 Press the a change e to Selections desired digit then Bao desired value 6 to 48 then press the 7 Press the to advance to the next parameter MINOR TIME PERIODS MINOR TIME PERIODS Press the a change then to Selections 0 t0 8 desired value then press ENTER 8 Press the 8 advance the next parameter BLANK MAJOR PERIODS BLANK MAJOR PERIODS 2 reso ide to change kad EJ then to Selections desired value then the 0 to 48 ENTER Edition 3 6 4 RevG Section 6 9 Press the to advance to the next parameter MAJOR LINE PEN COLOR MATCH SCALE COLOR SELECT A COLOR MAJOR LINE PEN COLOR MATCH SCALE COLOR Press the 2a change then to desired choice then press the E ENTER Selections 10 Press the to advance to the next parameter MAJOR LINE PEN COLOR only seen if MAJOR LINE PEN COLOR selected was SELECT A COLOR Note Valid choice of color depends on number of colors specified when ordered One color Red Two colors Red Green Three colors
130. UTS 4 Four Relays 0 None 6 Six Relays 1 One 4 20 mA Output Non Isolated 8 Eight Relays 2 Two 4 20 mA Outputs Non lsolated 3 One 4 20 mA Output Isolated SSR OUTPUTS 4 Two 4 20 mA Outputs Isolated 0 None 5 Three 4 20 mA Outputs Isolated 2 Two SSRDs 6 Four 4 20 mA Outputs Isolated 4 Four SSRDs 6 Six SSRDs 8 Eight SSRDs Pens colors are added to the instrument in the following order red then green then blue and then black Total quantity of SPDT Relays and SSR Drivers must be less than or equal to eight Model Number Serial Number Section 1 1 3 Edition 3 Rev G 1 4 SPECIFICATIONS DESCRIPTION The instrument is the first circular chart recorder with the ability to record trend data and print alphanumeric annotation in four colors It uses unique rings only charts and has the ability to zone and scale trend data These capabilities not only provide the best trend data readability but also instant association with the corresponding scales Whether it s a basic application of recording inputs to a demanding application requiring derived variables logic functions totalization or other capabilities the instrument can be supplied with the necessary level of sophistication while maintaining an uncomplicated operator interface MODELS The instrument is available in versions for trend recording of one to four values The number of colors can equal the number of trended values or all four colors can be provided Th
131. VersaChart Manual Revision Log Revision Date Edition 1 6 16 95 Edition 1 7 14 95 Edition 1 8 10 95 Edition 1 11 6 95 Edition 1 Rev D Edition 1 Rev E Edition 2 RevF 4 1 97 Prefix amp Table of Contents Description Released Revised Pages 4 5 1 1 thru 1 5 2 8 4 3 4 5 4 6 4 9 thru 4 11 4 17 4 37 4 39 4 40 4 42 4 48 4 50 4 57 4 100 4 101 7 1 thru 7 3 10 1 11 1 C 2 C 3 C 5 thru C 7 C 10 C 11 C 13 added D 1 thru D 4 and E 1 thru E 2 Revised Pages 2 9 thru 2 13 3 16 4 13 4 29 11 2 thru 11 7 B 1 thru B 2 C 4 C 10 and E1 thru Revised Pages 5 1 3 1 5 2 6 2 15 3 5 3 6 3 35 4 8 4 17 4 26 4 45 4 79 thru 4 101 6 9 thru 6 14 8 1 10 1 thru 10 2 11 4 11 6 A 1 A 4 E1 thru Added Pages 10 3 thru 10 5 11 7 thru 11 8 A 6 thru A 7 D 7 Deleted Pages 4 102 Revised Pages 1 3 5 1 3 thru 1 6 2 1 2 3 2 4 2 6 2 8 2 15 2 16 3 3 thru 3 8 3 10 3 11 3 19 thru 3 21 3 24 3 28 3 29 3 36 thru 3 39 4 1 thru 4 3 4 6 thru 4 13 4 15 4 17 4 18 4 23 4 24 4 26 4 30 4 31 3 35 4 58 4 59 4 62 4 63 4 65 thru 4 67 4 71 4 73 4 74 4 77 thru 4 99 5 2 6 1 6 6 6 12 6 13 8 4 9 3 thru 9 8 10 4 11 5 thru 11 8 A 2 B 2 E 2 Added Pages 8 5 9 7 9 8 A 8 Deleted Pages 4 100 4 101 Revised Pages 1 2 2 4 23 thru 4 24 4 58 thru 4 59 4 63 4 65 4 67 4 73 thru 4 74 4 80 4 87 4 91 4 95 thru 4 96 11 1 thr
132. WORD Edition 3 3 46 Section 3 Rev G Section 4 Configuration Selections made in Configuration set up the recorder for operation Not all sections are applicable for every recorder Before or during configuration of your recorder it is recommended that the Software Reference Record Sheet found at end of Section 3 be completely filled in 4 1 ENTERING CONFIGURATION From the Normal Display press the until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line If PASS 02 WORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to CON FIGURATION is allowed If CONFIGURATION is not displayed then Configuration has been disabled Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Configuration 4 1 1 INPUTS Input defines input types ranges units scaling and display status for each of 1 8 inputs With CONFIGURATION in the lower display line press the then until INPUTS appears in the lower display line 1 Press the to display INPUT NUMBER INPUT NUMBER Selections Press the to change then or to desired input number then press the ENTER to store into memory Section 4 4 1 Edition 3 Rev G 2 Press the to advance to the next parameter COPY INITIALIZE IVx COPY INITIALIZE NO Selections Press the to change then or YES or NO to desired selection th
133. actuators that can control instrument activities Timers can count up to a terminal value or count down from a value to zero At the end of the timing function their respective actuators are set true Each timer has a reset actuator which when true causes the timer value to be set to its initial value TMx RESET ACTUATOR System Prompts Confiugration Timers Page 4 63 Parameter that selects an actuator which when true causes the specified timer value to be set to its initial value zero or the Timer Period value depending on whether the Timer Type is Count Up or Count Down TOTAL IS FLOW System Prompts Configuration Totalizers Page 4 55 Parameter used to specify what scaling factor the flow value should be multiplied by in calculating the total value If the choice TIMES 1 000 000 is selected and the flow was 0 3 MGD Million Gallons per Day at the end of a day the total would be 0 3 million gallons but the totalizer would display a value of 300 000 0 3 times 1 000 000 and the total would correspond to gallons maybe displayed as GAL TOTALIZER GENERAL FORMULA The general formula for the totals calculated each second is TOTAL TOTAL VALUE TTB FACTOR Where VALUE is the once a second value or one second average for the selected input source TTBis 1 for TOTAL TIME BASE PER SECOND 60 for TOTAL TIME BASE PER MINUTE 3600 for TOTAL TIME BASE PER HOUR 86400 for TOTAL TIME BASE PER DAY FACTOR is the selec
134. ag A general term which refers to a description or designation that is displayed or recorded There are tags for the instrument chart and each input process variable recorder etc Tags are text parameters TC TYPE System Prompts Configuration Inputs Page 4 3 Parameter which specifies the thermocouple type to be used Edition 3 C 12 Appendix C Rev G TEST System Prompts Section 10 Prompt section which provides access to various test routines Text A general term which refers to a parameter that is a series of characters such as a display tag units or contents of a configurable message TIME BASE System Prompts Configuration Totalizers Page 4 54 Parameter that specifies the time base of the flow rate so the instrument can calculate the total The choices are units PER SEC PER MIN PER HOUR PER DAY and PULSES Time between print cycles see Print interval TIME FORMAT System Prompts Configuration Instrument Settings Page 4 75 Parameter that specifies the format for displaying time AM PM or 24 HOUR TIME FORMAT System Prompts Configuration Timers Page 4 62 Parameter that specifies the time format for timers SECONDS MINUTES SECONDS or HOURS MINUTES SECONDS TIMER TYPE System Prompts Configuration Timers Page 4 62 Parameter that specifies the type of timer OFF COUNT UP or COUNT DOWN TIMERS System Prompts Configuration Page 4 61 Prompts section that configures periodic
135. alues 3 DRAG MIN TO MAX records the minimum and maximum values during the 24 second interval and includes dots between the values 4 AVERAGE VALUES records the average of the values during the 24 second interval 5 CONNECT THE AVERAGES records the average of the values during the 24 second interval but includes dots between successive averages Major time lines are printed as a series of dots with noticeable spacing and extend from the inner chart ring to the outer chart ring The number of major time lines printed on the chart is determined by the MAJOR TIME PERIODS parameter in the CHART CONFIGURATION prompts section The color of the major time line is programmable Scale lines are printed as a series of dots closely spaced to form a solid line and are printed only in the area of the chart zone or portion of chart span used for the respective trend line The scale lines are printed on top of major time lines The number of scale lines printed on the chart is determined by the MAJOR TIME PERIODS parameter the number of BLANK MAJOR TIME PERIODS and the number of trend lines being recorded The color of the scale line is the same as the respective trend line Minor time lines are printed as a series of dots with spacing greater than major time lines and extend from the inner chart ring to the outer chart ring The number of minor time lines printed on the chart between the major time lines is determined by the MINOR TIME PERI
136. amming and configu ration 3 2 INSTRUMENT MODES The instrument incorporates a multilevel prompting scheme The Display Chart and Scroll keys are used to gain access to each of the three prompting sections of the unit When the instrument is not in one of the prompt sections it is considered to be in the Normal Display mode 3 2 1 NORMAL DISPLAY The Normal Display is the normal operator mode for the recorder and display In Normal Display the instrument can provide various displays of Instrument Tag Time Date Input Values Derived Values Process Values and other values that may be added to the Display Sequence in Configuration In Normal Display the instrument may be in Sequential automatic advance or Continuous manual advance display mode 3 2 2 DISPLAY PROMPTS The Display Prompts provides access to all display related configuration functions and operator inputs The Display Prompts section contains only one level 3 2 3 CHART PROMPTS The Chart Prompts provides access to all chart related configuration functions and also the prompts for changing the chart The Chart Prompts section contains two levels With CHART CONFIGURATION displayed the Down Arrow key will access that section of prompts which will be one level down While in CHART CONFIGURATION the Scroll and Left Arrow keys will move through the parameter choices and the Up Arrow key will return to the previous level which will be one level up 3 2 4 SYSTEM
137. between printed scale values The values printed are calculated by the instrument If the SCALE INTERVAL parameter is zero no scale is printed but the recorder tag will be printed Values corresponding to the bottom of the recordable area are located slightly upscale so that they are printable Values corresponding to the top of the recordable area are located slightly downscale so that they do not interfere with the time and date All other values are centered vertically on the corresponding concentric circle The UNITS that are configured for display are printed next to the outermost scale value The RECORDER TAG for each recorded trend is printed underneath the outermost scale value The CHART TAG time and date are printed just beyond the recording area at successive major time lines as follows On 10 and 12 Charts CHART TAG TIME DATE TIME On 11 Charts CHART TAG DATE CHART TAG DATE TIME TIME TIME TIME The color of the scale line scale values units and recorder tag always correspond to the trend for which they apply The color of the major time lines minor time lines time and date chart tag are each programmable 3 8 1 CHART PRINTING INTERRUPTIONS When chart printing is interrupted momentarily the printing resumes as though no interruption had occurred If the interruption lasts beyond the point at which data should have been printed the chart will advance to the appropriate point printing minor and major time li
138. break due to voltage divider or shunt resistors For sensor break detection to work on these input types the INPUT RANGE LOW analog signal low and or RANGE LIMIT LOW engineering units low parameters must be set high enough such that at zero volts mA the resultant value will be at least 5 below the span established by RANGE LIMIT LOW and RANGE LIMIT HIGH Section 2 2 7 3 RevG 2 3 3 POWER CONNECTIONS WARNING UNIT SHOULD HAVE A POWER SWITCH OR CIRCUIT BREAKER IN CLOSE PROXIMITY OF EQUIPMENT AND WITHIN EASY REACH OF THE OPERATOR THE SWITCH SHALL BE MARKED AS THE DISCONNECTING DEVICE FOR THE UNIT FIGURE 2 6 Connect the line voltage hot and neutral to L and N respectively Connect the ground wire to the terminal labeled G UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY zo 8 8 2 d Edition 3 2 8 Section 2 Rev G 2 3 4 THERMOCOUPLE CONNECTIONS NOTE Up to four Input Boards may be present stacked 4 high Input Board 1 is the bottom board Two versions of Input Board s may be found see Figure 2 7 and Figure 2 7A Input Board 1 is used for Input 1 and if equipped Input 2 Input Board 2 is used for Input 3 and Input 4 if equipped Input board 3 is for Input 5 and Input 6 Input Board 4 is for Input 7 and Input 8 Connect the positive leg of the thermocouple to terminal 1 and the negative leg to terminal 2 on the Input Board s to be T C Terminal block 1 TB1 is for Input 1 3 5 and 7 and terminal block 2 TB2
139. ctions Press the ac change then to desired value then press the Section 4 4 25 Edition 3 Rev G 14 Press ine to advance to the next parameter VALUE FILTER DVxx VALUE FILTER 0 SECONDS Press the B change then to pick desired value then press the eren Selections 0 to 9999 seconds ENTER 15 Press ine to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY OPTION DVxx DISPLAY OPTION IN BOTH MODES Press the a change then to pick Selections NOT DISPLAYED desired choice then press the IN CONTINUOUS MODE IN SEQUENTIAL MODE IN BOTH MODES R V R L S 16 Press tne to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY FILTER DVxx DISPLAY FILTER 0 SECONDS Press the a change then to pick 0 to 9999 seconds desired value then press the a ENTER 17 Press the and the display advances to the next derived input to be programmed Refer to the begin ning of this section page 4 18 Edition 3 4 26 Section 4 Rev G DERIVED VARIABLE FUNCTION To simplify formulas or make them easier to read various letters or abbreviations are used for the inputs such as B X or TEMP During configuration a descriptive prompt will appear on line 1 as specified by PROMPT for each input while the source of the input is selected via a choice of inputs on line 2 A Derived Variable can have up to five value inputs one actuator input and a reset actuator The description for
140. ctions desired choice then press the f 0104 ENTER Section 4 4 57 Edition 3 Rev 9 Press ne to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY OPTION Tx DISPLAY OPTION IN BOTH MODES Selections NOT DISPLAYED Press the to change then to IN CONTINUOUS MODE IN SEQUENTIAL MODE desired choice then press the IN BOTH MODES T L Z R S 10 Press a to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY FORMAT Tx DISPLAY FORMAT DIGITS NO COMMAS Press the to change then to desired choice then press the ENTER Selections DIGITS NO COMMAS DIGITS WITH COMMAS 11 Press the to advance to the next parameter TOTALIZER TYPE Tx TOTALIZER TYPE CONTINUOUS Selections CONTINUOUS PRELOAD 0 COUNT TO PRESET Press the to change then to COUNT DOWN PRESET desired choice then press the e Edition 3 4 58 Section 4 Rev G 12 Press the to advance to the next parameter TOTALIZER PRESET Tx TOTALIZER PRESET 1 units Selections Press the to change then to 0 to 999999999 decimal position 0 h 9999 9999 desired value then press the decimal position 4 Note Units are that of TOTAL T ie T A L Z R S Total Decimal Position 13 Press to advance the next parameter LOW FLOW CUTOFF Tx LOW FLOW CUTOFF 0 units Press the to change then to 1 HH 0 desired value then press the enren Als
141. d in the lower display line Select which type of TC used by depress ing to alternately select TC NARROW or TC WIDE see Table 11 2 page 11 2 then depress e E when the TC Range used is blinking Step 4 Be sure that the jumpers on the Input Board for the input being calibrated are positioned as shown in Table 11 3 Page 11 3 Step 5 Depress the and IVx CAL will appear in the upper display line and or CJC will appear the lower display line Select CJC by depressing the then the until CJC is blinking then depress Step 6 IVx CJC TC TYPE will appear in the upper display line and J will appear in the lower display line Depress the then UP DOWN LEFT and SCROLL as required to select the type of TC being used then depress the Section 11 11 5 Edition 3 RevG Step 7 Connect the proper TC type up to the input being calibrated Place the thermometer next to the HOT Junction sensor point of the TC connected Depress the and the upper display line will display IVx CAL CJC and lower display line will display CJC READS 25 0 C Depress the then use the UP DOWN to change the display to read what the mercury thermometer is reading then depress the Depress the and the upper display line will display IVx PERFORM CAL Depress the and select YES to perform calibration of the CJC Wait one minute then depress the key Step 9 Repeat steps 1 through 8 for each input board to be calibrated
142. decimal position 4 Note Units are that of INPUT RATE If no units were selected the display will show NONE Input Decimal Position Section 4 4 59 Edition 3 Rev G 14 Press ine db to advance to the next parameter RESET ACTUATOR Tx RESET ACTUATOR NONE OFF Selections NONE OFF ON CONTINUOUS Press the to change then ANY ALARM ANY PROCESS ALARM aS required to desired choice then 11 A12 A13 A14 1 A22 A23 A24 1 A32 A33 A34 1 M2 M3 M4 RUMENT ALARM press the CHART FULL ENTER OPINP1 OPINP2 OPINP3 OPINP4 OPINP5 OPINP6 OPINP7 OPINP8 OPINP9 OPINP 10 OPINP 11 OP INP 12 CHART CHANGED CHART ROTATION REND DATA COLLECT ALT CHART SPEED DA1 DA2 DA3 DA4 DA5 DA6 DA7 DA8 DA DA10 DA11 DA12 DA13 DA14 DA15 16 DA17 DA18 19 DA20 DA DA22 DA23 DA24 PRESET1 PRESET 2 PRESET PRESET 4 TOTALPO1 TOTAL 2 TOTAL PO4 TIME 1 TIME DATE 1 TIME 2 TIME DATE 2 TIME 1 TO TIME 2 TIME DATE 1 TO 2 TIMER TIMER 2 TIMER3 TIMER 4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 COMM TRIGGER 1 Additional selections for use with controller option COMM TRIGGER 2 OUTPUT 11 X OUTPUTI2 COMM TRIGGER 3 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22 COMM TRIGGER 4 OUTPUT31 X OUTPUT32 Fi F2 F3 F4 F5 OUTPUT41 OUTPUT42 RESET MOD ENTER CMF1 CATF2 CATF3 ON THE HOUR CA1F4 CA1F5 DAY OF WEEK CA2F1 CA2F2 2 DAY OF MONTH CA2F4 CA2F5 RELAY 1 RELAY 2 CA3F1 CA3F2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 CA3F4 CA3F5 RELAY 5 RELAY 6 CA4F1 CA4F2 4
143. dicating the current state of the fan Depress the key located directly below the choice that is not blinking F1 FAN OFF amp F5 FAN ON IF FAN ON was selected a relay should energize corresponding to the relay assigned above If FAN OFF was selected a relay should de energize corresponding to the relay assigned above Edition 3 D 2 Appendix D Rev G EXAMPLE 4 Operator Messages Operator Messages are user defined messages to advise or provide information via the display that selected actuators are active The messages are displayed as specified by the Operator Message Display Mode parameter setting Application Auser would like a visual indication whenever the total exceeds the preset along with instructions for an operator Configuration Operator Message Operator Message 1 OM1 Actuator PRESET 1 OM1 Line 1 Text TOTAL EXCEED PRESET OM1 Line 2 Text PHONE 908 6666 OM1 DISPLAY Mode PREEMPT TO OFF PREEMPT TO OFF Specifies that the message overrides the display of values until any key is pressed after which it will not appear until the actuator goes inactive then active again EXAMPLE 5 Chart Messages Chart Messages allow user defined text up to 4 values and a time date stamp to be recorded on the chart triggered on the transition of an actuator not its state The message can be one to six lines with missing lines causing the remaining line to be moved up The message is recorded on the six outermost lines w
144. dvance to the next parameter ALARM 4 SETPOINT If RATE Alarm was selected setpoint refers to RATE Ax4 SETPOINT Units correspond to Units configured in 100 units Process Variables with per unit time included if a rate of change alarm is specified Selections Press the to change then 4 to Decimal position 999999 Process decimal position 0 desired value then press the Variables 9 9999 decimal position 4 6 Press the D the display advances to the next applicable ALARMS FOR PV NUMBER prompt Refer to the beginning of this section page 7 1 Section 7 7 3 Edition 3 Rev G Section 8 Action Time Settings Action Time Settings are simply TIME DATE settings that can be used to initiate a desired action Selections made in Action Time Settings are used to generate actuators TIME 1 TIME DATE 1 TIME 2 TIME DATE 2 TIME 1 TO TIME 2 and TIME DATE 1 TO 2 The TIME 1 and TIME 2 actuators are TRUE when the time is equal to or greater than the TIME values during each 24 hour day and FALSE between midnight and the TIME specified The TIME DATE actuators are TRUE when the TIME and DATE are equal to or greater than the TIME and DATE values and remain TRUE after midnight TIME 1 TO TIME 2 is TRUE when the time is equal to or greater than the TIME 1 and less than or equal to TIME 2 during the next 24 hour period EXAMPLES TIME 128 TIME 2 24 PM 8 HOURS from 8 am to 4 pm TI
145. e chart size 10 11 or 12 inches CHART SPEED Chart Prompts Page 6 1 This prompt only appears if ALTERNATE SPEED USED is set to YES The choices of NORMAL or ALTERNATE control the ALT CHART SPEED actuator which is typically selected for the ALT SPEED ACTUATOR parameter in the CHART CONFIGURATION section Chart Speed Chart Prompts Chart Configuration Page 6 3 Configured at the NORMAL SPEED prompt provides user selectable chart speeds CHART TAG Chart Prompts Chart Configuration Page 6 3 Parameter used to specify a description or designation that can be printed on the edge of the chart CHART TYPE USED Chart Prompts Chart Configuration Page 6 2 Parameter that specifies the type of chart being used The choices are RINGS ONLY RINGS AND TIME LINES and RINGS LINES SCALES RINGS ONLY corresponds to charts that only have preprinted rings and this is what is typically used as it takes full advantage of the recorder s ability to annotate the chart In some cases customers may prefer preprinted lines to be used for time lines and scale lines which corresponds to RINGS AND TIME LINES or preprinted scale values as well which corresponds to RINGS LINES SCALES Choice A general term which refers to a parameter that is configured by selecting one of several descriptions that ap pears in the lower display rather than a value or number Choices vary from the simple YES and NO to one of a list of over 100 actuators COLL
146. e latter option provides the greatest color flexibility and makes it easier to add trend capability to the instrument in the field The instrument can have up to eight inputs and inputs are not directly associated with trend pens The instrument can trend any combination of inputs averages derived variables logic states even totals A full compliment of options provides the flexibility to handle virtually any type of application FEATURES Color chart annotation 1 2 4 trend pen versions All versions with optional four color capability 10 11 or 12 charts Linear scales and radial time lines Trend zoning and dual zone capability Up to 8 universal inputs 40 character vacuum fluorescent display Simultaneous display of up to 4 process values Building block approach for flexibility Math and equation package with custom curves Logic equations for actuators 9 digit totalizes Chart messages Operator inputs Operator messages Real time clock Time and date printed on charts CONFIGURATION A multilevel prompting scheme provides rapid access to all configuration data By model number and selective enabling the software displays only those configuration sections needed The 40 character vacuum fluorescent display provides true English language prompts The 15 key keypad makes moving through the prompts and modifying the parameters intuitive Multiple choice selections and use of quick select keys simplifies the prog
147. e unit should use this address Also the comms address parameter will not show up if master is selected it must be programmed price to the selection of Master Selections SLAVE MASTER OFF 13 Press the to advance to the next parameter COMMS ADDRESS 1 only seen if SLAVE is selected in COMMUNICATIONS MODE COMMS ADDRESS Press the a change then to desired value then press the i 14 Press the to advance to the next parameter COMM BIT RATE Selections 1 to 247 COMMS BIT RATE 9600 Selections 9600 4800 Press the WE to change then as required to desired choice then press the 3 4 80 Section 4 15 Press the to advance to the next parameter COMMS PARITY COMMS PARITY ODD Press the a change then to desired choice then press the fewer Selections NONE ODD EVEN 16 Press the to advance to the next parameter INPUT SCAN SEQUENCE INPUT SCAN SEQUENCE 8 INPUTS 2 SCANS SEC Selections 8 i SCANS EC 4 INPUTS 4 SCANS SE 2INP 4S S 4INP 2S S Press the to change then to 1INP 8S S 21 45 5 INP 8S S 4INP 2S S desired choice then press the 21 45 2 25 41 15 11 85 11 45 21 25 11 85 11 45 41 15 11 85 21 25 41 15 11 85 11 25 61 15 The input scan rate is programmable and dependant the number of active inputs present The total scans per second for the instrument is 16 scans second and the instrument can
148. e various displays of instrument tag input values simulated values derived values process values and other values that may be added to the Display Sequence in Configuration or it may display active operator messages In Normal Display the instrument can also be in one of two conditions Sequential or Continuous Display The display provides upper case letters only with a few exceptions for engineering units The following is the format for the instrument tag and times and dates tag hh hours hh mm bb cc yy mm minutes aa AM or PM if not 24 hour bb month if MM DD YY format day if DD MM YY format cc day if MM DD YY format month if DD MM YY format yy year global alarm indicator or for the third date format tag hh mm aaddmmm yy dd day mmm month in 3 character format For Instrument tag the tag is the INSTRUMENT TAG from the INSTRUMENT SETTINGS prompts section and for ACTION TIME SETTINGS the tag is TIME 1 TAG or TIME 2 TAG from the ACTION TIME SETTINGS prompts section Continued on next page Section 3 3 5 Edition 3 Rev G The following is the 1 VAL at a time display format for process variables display tag aaaannnnnn uuuuuu A aaaa individual alarm indicators High Process Alarm L Low Process Alarm R Rate Alarm nnnnnn represents a number with up to as many digits as n s shown uuuuuu represents the corresponding units with up to as many characters as u s shown T
149. ected setpoint refers to RATE Ax1 SETPOINT Units correspond to Units configured in 100 units Process Variables with per unit time included if a rate of change alarm is specified Selections mon 4 999999 Press the to change then 4 to Decimal position decimal position 0 configured in Process 9 9999 desired value then press the Variables decimal position 4 Section 7 7 1 3 3 Press the 8 advance to the next parameter ALARM 2 SETPOINT If RATE Alarm was selected setpoint refers to RATE Ax2 SETPOINT Units correspond to Units configured in 100 units Process Variables with Press the a change then to per unit time included if a rate of change alarm is specified Selections Decimal position 999999 desired value then press the configured in Process decimal position 0 Variables 9 9999 decimal position 4 4 Press the to advance to the next parameter ALARM 3 SETPOINT If RATE Alarm was selected setpoint refers to RATE Units correspond to Ax3 SETPOINT Units configured in Process Variables with x per unit time included if 100 units a rate of change alarm is specified Decimal position Selections Press the a change then to configured in Process 999999 decimal position 0 desired value then press the 9 9999 EET decimal position 4 Edition 3 732 Section 7 Rev G 5 Press the to a
150. ed by pressing the MOD key while being in the Character Modify mode Each has its benefits and you may prefer to use one or both methods depending on the modification to be made Pressing the RESET key after pressing the MOD key will clear all characters from the curser to the right If the setting is text e g units tag etc the text will be left justified and the cursor will be positioned on the left most character The LEFT ARROW and SCROLL keys will move the cursor left or right In Character Modify the UP and DOWN ARROW keys change the character by scrolling through a list or string of available characters The LEFT ARROW and SCROLL keys will move the cursor left and right to allow chang ing another character Pressing the MOD key enters Character Selection Pressing the ESC key exits Modify no change being made to the string Pressing the ENTER key exits Modify and the new string will be displayed and entered into memory n Character Selection depressing the MOD key twice will initiate Character Selection The character to be changed on the lower line will be replaced by the block character all dots lit and the upper display line will show a character selection line instead of the parameter description The character selection line which contains the current character will be displayed with the cursor positioned on the current character The LEFT ARROW and SCROLL keys will move the cursor left and right on the current c
151. ed variables Any recorder value can be treated as a process value to provide alarming and special display capability Up to 4 variables can be recorded as analog trend lines on chart sizes of 10 11 or 12 inches in diameter The trend lines can be the result of instantaneous values connecting the values drag pen average values or con necting the average values The trend lines can be scaled and positioned on the chart in zones Trend scales units and a trend tag can be printed in the same color as time lines Dates times batch numbers operator IDs process values scales and alarm messages can all be printed on the chart in color Definitions for a large number of Terms and Concepts described in this manual are included in Appendix C 1 1 UNPACKING Remove the instrument and pen cartridge assembly from the shipping container and inspect for any damage due to shipment If any damage is noticed due to transit report and file a claim with the carrier Write the model number and serial number in spaces provided on Page 1 3 of this manual for future reference The model number and serial number are found on the label on the case viewed when platen is open CAUTION READ THIS MANUAL THE INTERNATIONAL HAZARD SYMBOL IS FOUND ADJACENT TO THE LOWER PLATEN HOLD DOWN SCREW IT IS IMPORTANT TO READ THIS MANUAL BEFORE INSTALLING OR COMMISSIONING THE UNIT Section 1 1 1 3 Rev G 1 2 INSTALLATION PEN CARTRIDGE ASSEMBLY
152. elay s and replace with solid state relays If a mechanical relay being powered by an instrument output device cannot be replaced a solid state relay can be used to isolate the instrument A separate isolation transformer to feed only instrumentation should be considered The transformer can isolate the instrument from noise found on the AC power input 4 If the instrument is being installed on existing equipment the wiring in the area should be checked to insure that good practices have been followed AC Power Wiring Earth Ground The instrument includes noise suppressing components that require an earth ground connection to function To verify that a good earth ground is being attached make a resistance check from the instrument chassis to the nearest metal water pipe or proven earth ground This reading should not exceed 100 ohms Each instrument should have a dedicated earth ground Do not chain link multiple instrument ground wires Neutral For 115 VAC It is good practice to assure that the AC neutral is at or near ground potential To verify this a voltmeter check between neutral and ground should be performed On the AC range the reading should not be more than 50 millivolts If it is greater than this amount the secondary of the AC transformer supplying the instrument should be checked by an electrician A proper neutral will help ensure maximum performance from the instrument Wire Isolation Segregation The instrument is
153. en press ENTER Choose YES if the parameters to be programmed are the same as another INPUT already programmed 02 If selection is NO see Step 3 If selection is YES IVx COPY FROM INPUT 0 INITIALIZED X Input to be copied from j 0 FACTORY DEFAULT input number to be copied from 3 Press the to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY TAG IVx DISPLAY TAG INPUT x Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for Selection Character Selection instructions Edition 3 4 2 Section 4 Rev G 4 Press the to advance to the next parameter INPUT TYPE RANGE IVx INPUT TYPE RANGE OFF NO INPUT Press change then a OFFN INPUT to desired choice then press the TC NARROW TC WIDE p RTD mA 25mV 100mV 1VOLT 10 VOLT SWITCH CONTACT COMMS 02 5 Press the to advance to the next parameter OFF NO INPUT selected no other prompts for Input x will be seen go to Step 1 Pg 4 1 TC TYPE selected go to Step 5A RTD TYPE selected go to Step 5B mV mA Volt Switch Contact go to Step 6 COMMS go to Step 6 5A IVx TC TYPE J Press no idle change then a to desired choice then press the ENTER Selections J K E S R B N C G D NI NI MOLY PLATINEL Il Press the to advance to step 5C Section 4 4 3 Edition 3 Rev G 5 IVx RTD TYPE PT 100 00385 DIN Selections Press d change then a PT 100
154. en press the e ENTER 2 Press the to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY TAG TMx DISPLAY TAG TIMER X Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for Text instructions Section 4 4 63 Edition 3 Rev G 290 m zx A 3 Press ine to advance to the next parameter TIMER TYPE TMx TIMER TYPE T OFF M E Press the to change then R Selections S OFF COUNT UP as required to desired choice then N If OFF was selected no other prompts for TIMER X press the ER l ENTER will be seen refer back to step 1 page 4 61 4 Press the to advance to the next parameter TIME FORMAT TMx TIME FORMAT SECONDS Selections Press the to change then to SECONDS MINUTES SECONDS desired choice then press the HOURS MINUTES SECOND Format SSS seconds MMM SS Minutes Seconds HHH MM SS Hours Minutes Seconds 5 Press the 8 advance the next parameter TIMER PERIOD selected TIME FORMAT TMx TIMER PERIOD format 0 Press the to change then to Selections 0 to 999 desired value then press the Edition 3 4 64 Section 4 Rev G 6 Press nef to advance to the next parameter RESET ACTUATOR Section 4 TMx RESET ACTUATOR NONE OFF Selections NONE OFF ON CONTINUOUS ANY ALARM ANY PROCESS ALARM A11 A12 A13 A14 A21 A22 A23 A24 A31 A32 A33 A34 M1 M2 M3 M4 INSTRUMENT ALARM CHART FULL OPINP1 OPINP2 OPINP3 OPINP 4 OPINP5 OPINP6 OPINP7
155. en to ante 0 desired value then press the eren 0 9999 uai decimal position 4 P R S S V A R A B L S NOTE If RATE Alarm is selected Hysteresis equals RATE in units TIME BASE 19 Press the to advance to the next parameter ALARM 3 TYPE Ax3 ALARM TYPE OFF Selections for recorder only PROCESS HIGH Press 9 change then to PROCESS LOW Additional selections for USe desired choice then press the RATE RISING with controller option BAND WITHIN RATE FALLING BAND OUTSIDE DEVIATION ABOVE DEVIATION BELOW CONTROL LOOP OPEN When CONTROL LOOP OPEN is selected for ALARM TYPE and NON PID is selected for CONTROL TYPE CONTROLLERS section of CONFIGURATION prompt LOOP ALARM TYPE will be displayed Edition 3 4 40 Section 4 Rev G 20 Press the advance to the next parameter ALARM 3 TIME BASE only seen if Ax3 TYPE is RATE Ax3 TIME BASE PER SEC Press change then 2 to desired choice then press 21 Press the 8 advance to the next parameter ALARM 3 SAMPLE PERIOD only seen if Ax3 TYPE is Selections PERSEC PERMIN PERHOUR PER DAY RATE Ax3 SAMPLE PERIOD 10 SECONDS Selections Press change then to 1 to 9999 seconds desired value then press ENTER 22 Press the advance to the next parameter ALARM 3 HYSTERESIS P R S S V A R L 3
156. ep 6 If mA mV or VOLT was selected the SCROLL key will display IVx CONVERSION next LINEAR is the default condition Select according to the type of signal conversion desired Step 7 The next display will show IVx DISPLAY UNITS Select F C or OTHER If OTHER is selected the SCROLL key will next bring up IVx OTHER UNITS on the display Use the MOD key then UP DOWN arrows and ENTER to specify the Display Units Edition 3 3 14 Section 3 Rev Step 8 Next the display will show IVx DECIMAL POSITION IVx RANGE LIMIT LOW and IVx RANGE LIMIT HIGH These will be used to calculate the engineering units range for volt milliamp inputs for the Input being configured For Thermocouple RTD inputs their values establish the expected range outside of which the instrument will consider the value out of range Select accordingly with the MOD SCROLL UP DOWN arrows and ENTER Step 9 Depress the SCROLL key and skip over the rest of the Input Selections until the display shows IVx DISPLAY OPTION Select INBOTH MODES for this input Step 10 After depressing the ENTER key depress the UP ARROW key to get back to the previous level of CONFIGURE Step 11 Depress the SCROLL key until RECORDERS is displayed in the lower line display Step 12 Depress the DOWN ARROW key to enter the Recorder Configuration section Depress the SCROLL key and skip over the displays shown until the display shows Rx VALUE TO RECORD Use the MOD and UP DOWN keys to
157. er second for the instrument is 16 scans second and the instrument can have up to 8 inputs configured 1 6 Section 1 ACCURACY TABLES See Note 1 2 3 4 5 6 TC RANGE REF LIN FACTORY REF LIN DEVIATION RESOL TYPE ACC Y ACC Y CAL CAL ACC Y eC C C C C bit J 0 1200 0 43 0 20 0 32 0 95 0 12 0 066 WIDE 200 0 0 63 0 08 0 56 1 28 0 02 0 097 J 0 400 0 11 0 05 0 33 0 50 0 04 0 017 NARROW 200 0 0 16 0 08 0 56 0 80 0 02 0 024 K 0 1370 0 62 0 26 0 40 1 28 0 14 0 095 WIDE 250 0 1 05 0 30 0 78 2 13 0 03 0 159 K 0 500 0 15 0 08 0 39 0 62 0 05 0 023 NARROW 250 0 0 26 0 30 0 78 1 35 0 03 0 040 E 0 1000 0 33 0 19 0 28 0 80 0 10 0 050 WIDE 250 0 0 66 0 42 0 62 1 71 0 03 0 101 E 0 300 0 09 0 19 0 29 0 57 0 03 0 014 NARROW 250 0 0 17 0 42 0 62 1 21 0 03 0 025 N 0 1300 0 68 0 21 0 42 1 32 0 13 0 104 WIDE 250 0 1 44 0 60 0 93 2 97 0 03 0 220 N 0 600 0 18 0 11 0 44 0 73 0 06 0 028 NARROW 200 0 0 31 0 20 0 81 1 32 0 02 0 048 250 200 0 93 0 60 2 15 3 68 0 01 0 142 To achieve stated results the following thermocouples must be used with the INPUT TYPE RANGE set to TC NARROW G 1800 2300 1 59 0 54 0 79 2 92 0 05 0 243 800 1800 1 23 0 43 0 64 2 30 0 10 0 188 500 800 1 38 0 25 0 70 2 33 0 03 0 210 300 500 1 79 0 25 0 87 2 91 0 02 0 274 0 300 3 65 0 58 1 61 5 84 0 03 0 557 C 1800 2800 2 14 0 54 1 01 3 68 0 05 0 326 1200 1800 1 62 0 43 0 80 2 85 0 06 0 247 300 1200 1
158. er the input type is thermocouple RTD volts milliamps millivolts pulse switch or not used OFF NO INPUT INSTANTANEOUS VALUES System Prompts Configuration Recorders Page 4 46 The choice for the parameter RECORDING METHOD that prints a single dot corresponding to the instantaneous value of the trended value at the end of the print interval This method records a series of dots which may not form a continuous trend line INSTR ON ACTUATOR System Prompts Configuration Instrument Settings Page 4 73 Parameter used to specify an actuator which controls whether the instrument s outputs are active When inactive all outputs relays mA LEDs are reset totalizing is stopped and the instrument displays the Instrument Tag and INSTRUMENT OFF The instrument continues to scan and process inputs derived variables process vari ables alarms but with no relay outputs times and dates actuators derived variables records and collects data INSTRUMENT SETTINGS System Prompts Configuration Page 4 72 Prompts section that configures various instrument wide parameters such as instrument tag time and date formats the current date and time and some special actuator selections INSTRUMENT TAG System Prompts Configuration Instrument Settings Page 4 72 Parameter used to specify a description or designation that can be displayed with the current time and date in the Display Sequence LED ACTUATOR System Prompts
159. er to increase the number of segments or to make use of common profiling sequences When all segments in the initiated profile have been executed the specified number of loops the WHEN SEGS DONE parameter can join another profile The instrument retains which profile was initiated as well as which profile is currently running or joined When one of the profiles ends with END processing will revert back to the initial profile where if Profile Loop Count is greater than one the unit will proceed through the initial profile or terminate as specified in the initial profile 18 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter Pxx PROFILE LOOP COUNT Selections 0 9999 Press the MOD key to change then press the LEFT SCROLL UP DOWN as required to desired loop count then press the ENTER key Profile Loop Count The profile loop count will appear in all profiles but only the initial profile will use the loop count At the end of a profile the profile loop count will determine if the profile will terminate or proceed through the profile again 19 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter Pxx END ACTION Selections are OFF EVENTS OFF Unit turns all outputs off or 0 including the events OFF EVENTS SAME Unit turns control outputs off or 0 but keeps the events in the same condition they were on remain on off remain off CONTROL EVENTS SAME Unit reverts to control with the events the same Press the MOD
160. ere integration of the error will occur centered the control setpoint 9 Press the to advance to the next parameter INTEGRATION SHIFT only if proportional output Cx INTEGRATION SHIFT Note Units correspond to Units 0 units configured in Process Variables Selections Press the to change then 26 0 to 9 9999 decimal position 4 to desired number then press the INTEGRATION SHIFT represents a shift or offset for the integration band from its normal operating position centered on the control setpoint Section 13 13 35 Edition 3 Rev G 10 Press the 8 advance to the next parameter OUTPUT 1 AUTO RESET only if output 1 is proportional Cx OUT 1 AUTO RESET 0 00 REPEATS MIN Selections Press the to change then or 0 to 100 00 to desired number then press the f 11 Press the to advance to the next parameter OUTPUT 2 AUTO RESET only if output 2 is proportional Cx OUT 2 AUTO RESET 0 00 REPEATS MIN Selections Press the to change then or 0 to 100 00 to desired number then press the AUTO RESET Integration compensates for process load variations which cause the process value to deviate from setpoint Integration will occur over the range defined by the INTEGRATION BAND The value is defined in repeats per minute Edition 3 13 36 Section 13 Rev G 12 Press the to advance to the next parameter OUTPUT 1 RATE only if output 1 is proportional Cx OUT 1 RATE 0 00
161. erived from a temperature coefficient of 01 C or 100ppm C expressed in units of the corresponding range 6 Resolution on thermocouples and RTDs is derived as a function of the input voltage Range and dV dT Appendix E E 3 Edition 3 Rev G
162. ge then UP DOWN to desired choice then press the ENTER key If one of the DISPLAY option is selected the parameters displayed are as follows START PROFILE number description CURRENT PROFILE number description status status CURRENT SEGMENT NUMBER number RAMP TIME hhh mm ss DWELL hhh mm ss EVENT 12345678 OUTPUTS ssssssss setpoint description may be up to four and only if configured to be displayed in setpoint value SETPOINT Configuration status The top display line displays whether the profile is RUNNING HOLDING or AUTO HOLDING The bottom display line displays if the profile is RAMPING or in DWELL 8 Press the SCROLL key and the display advances back to the beginning of Profile Settings When Profiling is included in an instrument several actuators are added to the choice list as indicated in bold in the list below NONE OFF ON CONTINUOUS ANY ALARM ANY PROCESS ALARM A11 A12 A13 A14 A21 A22 A23 A24 A31 A32 A33 A34 A41 A42 A43 A44 INSTRUMENT ALARM CHART FULL OP INP 1 OP INP 2 OP INP 3 OP INP 4 OP INP 5 OP INP 6 OP INP 7 OP INP 8 OP INP 9 OP INP 10 OP INP 11 OP INP 12 CHART CHANGED CHART ROTATION TREND DATA COLLECT DAI DA2 14 5 Edition 3 Rev G DA4 DA7 DA10 DA13 DA16 19 22 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 22 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT 32 OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT 42 EVENT 2 EVENT 4 EVENT EVENT 8 EVENT 1 EVENT 3 EVENT 5 EVENT 7 DAS DA8 DAT1 DA14 DA17 DA20
163. ge the run hold state and continue an aborted profile A profile is made up of one to eight segments with each segment consisting of aramp and a dwell The ramp will change the setpoint value from its current value or the current process value on the first ramp to the value specified over a designated time period ramp time The dwell maintains that setpoint for a designated time period dwell time The event outputs will change state at the beginning of each ramp and dwell as specified Each setpoint is assumed to be tied to its respective PV setpoint 1 used with process value 1 Since there are four control loops and four process values only the first four setpoints can be profiled 14 1 PROFILE ENTRY To enter the Profile Entry section from the Normal Display press the SCROLL key until PROFILE ENTRY is seen in the lower display line If PROFILE ENTRY is not displayed then it has been disabled Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Profile Entry 1 With PROFILE ENTRY displayed depress the DOWN key and PROFILE NUMBER will be displayed Selections 1 16 Press the MOD key to change then UP DOWN to desired profile number then press the ENTER key In the following paragraphs the displayed prompts will begin with Pxx or PxxSy where xx is the profile number and y is the segment number 2 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter Pxx DESCRIPTION Selections Text Refer to Section 3 4 2 C
164. ged to expand trend capability otherwise a relative costly pen arm assembly must be replaced as well Section 1 1 5 Edition 3 Rev G INPUTS Input Types Thermocouple RTD Voltage DC Current DC Contact Closure Impedance RTD Excitation Current INPUT PERFORMANCE Measurement Error Cold Junction Compensation Error Cold Junction Compensation Rejection Linearization Error Ambient Temperature Error Factory Calibration Error Isolation Common Mode Rejection Normal Mode Rejection Scan Rate Edition 3 Rev Types J K T R S E B G D C Ni Ni Moly and Platinel 11 Platinum 100 2 or 3 wire 00385 coefficient DIN 43760 IEC 751 00392 coefficient USA 00392 coefficient SAMA Nickel 100 2 or 3 wire 0 to 25mV 0 to 100 mVDC 0 to 1 VDC 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 20mA 4 to 20mA Internal 50 ohm shunt resistor Open closed switch sensing without external voltages or resistors 25mV 100mV 1 Volt 10 meg ohms 10 Volt 50 K ohms mA 50 ohms 1mA 025 of measurement span reference accuracy t 0 2 C 25 degrees C 0 04 degree C deviation from 25 degrees C TCs 0 25 C typical 0 5 C worst case with exceptions RTDs 0 1 C typical 0 3 C worst case 0 01 of span per degree C deviation from 25 degrees C Refer to the Accuracy Table 500 VDC 350 VAC 120 dB min 100 dB min 60 Hz or greater The input scan rate is programmable and dependant on the number of active inputs present The total scans p
165. hanging Text for instructions 3 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter Pxx SETPOINTS TO PROFILE Selections 0 4 Press the MOD key to change then UP DOWN to desired number of setpoints to profile then press the ENTER key 4 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter Pxx NUMBER OF SEGMENTS Selections 1 8 Press the MOD key to change then UP DOWN to desired number of segments then press the ENTER key THE FOLLOWING ARE REPEATED FOR EACH SEGMENT 5 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter PxxSy RAMP TIME displayed as hhh mm ss where h is hours m is minutes and s is seconds Press the MOD key to change then UP DOWN to desired number then press the ENTER key NOTE ENTER must be pressed after changing as necessary each unit of time hours minutes and seconds 6 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter PxxSy SETPOINT 1 Press the MOD key to change then UP DOWN to desired setpoint value then press the ENTER key Section 14 14 1 Edition 3 RevG 7 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter PxxSy SETPOINT 2 if setpoints gt 1 Press the MOD key to change then UP DOWN to desired setpoint value then press the ENTER key 8 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter PxxSy SETPOINT 3 if setpoints 3 or 4 Press the MOD key to change then UP DOWN to desired setpoint value then press the ENTER key 9 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next
166. haracter Selection instructions 5 Press the to advance to the next parameter LINE 2 TEXT OMxx LINE 2 TEXT 0 P R A T 0 R M 3 S S A G Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for Selections Text instructions 6 Press the to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY MODE OMxx DISPLAY MODE PREEMPT e m atu PREEMPT Press the change then to PREEMPT TO CYCLIC PREEMPT TO OFF desired choice then press the BACKGROUND Edition 3 4 92 Section 4 Rev G 7 Press the and the display advances to the next operator message to be programmed Refer to the beginning of this section page 4 85 4 1 16 CHART MESSAGES Chart Messages allow user defined text to be recorded on the chart From the Normal Display press the until CONFIGURATION is seen in the upper display line If PASS WORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to Configu ration is allowed If CONFIGURAITON is not displayed then Configuration has been disabled Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Configuration With CONFIGURATION in the display press the then the until CHART MESSAGES appears in the lower display line 1 Press the to display CHART MESSAGES CHART MESSAGE NUMBER Press the change then to 0 desired number then press the 2 Press the to advance to the next parameter COPY INITIALIZE
167. haracter selection line The UP and DOWN ARROW keys will change the line of characters displayed for selection Once the cursor is positioned on the desired character pressing the MOD key will store the desired character in the lower line the block character will move to the next position on the second line and the character selection line which contains the next charac ter will be displayed with the cursor positioned on that character While in Character Selection pressing the ESC key exits Character Selection and returns the unit to Character Modify where selection of another character may be made or pressing the ESC key again exits Modify While in Character Selection pressing the ENTER key after modifying a character will exit Character Selection and the new string will be displayed and entered into memory 3 4 3 CHANGING CHOICES If the setting is a YES NO choice the YES NO choice line will be displayed and the current choice will blink The LEFT ARROW and SCROLL keys will switch the selection between YES and NO Selecting the choice and pressing ENTER will exit Modify and the new setting will be displayed and entered into memory Some YES NO parameter choices are initialized to NO When changed to YES the unit may automatically advance to the next parameter upon depression of the ENTER key Continued on next page Section 3 3 3 Edition 3 Rev G If the setting is one of a list of choices the choice line containing the c
168. hat is typically used as it takes full advantage of the recorder s ability to annotate the chart by adding time lines scale lines and scale values ROTATE CHART ACTUATR Chart Prompts Chart Configuration Page 6 12 Parameter which specifies an actuator which when true causes the chart to rotate for normal trending When YES is selected for START NEW CHART the chart will be initialized per ACTION ON NEW CHART and then the chart is ready for trending If the chart is not rotating trend data recording is suspended but trend data collec tion may continue If it were collected when the chart began to rotate the collected data would be recorded first then the current real time data RTD TYPE System Prompts Configuration Inputs Page 4 4 Parameter that specifies the type of RTD PT 100 ohm 00385 DIN 00392 USA 00392 SAMA or NI 100 ohm SAMPLE PERIOD System Prompts Configuration Process Variables Page 4 37 Parameter that specifies the time period between samples for calculation of the rate of change of the Process Variable for Rate Alarms If the time between samples is too short one second for example a slight but quick change may erroneously trigger the alarm Conversely too long of a period may delay the recognition of an alarm condition The period is dependent upon the application SCALE INTERVAL System Prompts Configuration Recorders Page 4 49 Parameters that specifies the nu
169. he bottom of zone 1 SPAN 2 HIGH System Prompts Configuration Recorders Page 4 50 Parameter that specifies the trend value corresponding to the top of zone 2 START NEW CHART Chart Prompts Page 6 1 When YES is selected the unit will initialize itself for a new chart and automatically return to the Normal Display mode This prompt appears only after the chart has been stopped by selecting YES at the CHANGE CHART prompt STATE OR ON OFF System Prompts Configuration Relays Page 4 66 One of the choices for RELAY x USAGE which specifies that the relay output will be energized whenever the selected actuator is active This is used for most applications STOP AFTER 1 REV Chart Prompts Chart Configuration Page 6 11 Parameter which controls whether the chart stops recording after one revolution 360 degrees of rotation If YES is selected trend data would typically continue to be collected and would be recorded after a new chart is in stalled SWITCH CONTACT System Prompts Configuration Inputs Page 4 3 One of the choices for INPUT TYPE which specifies that it is used as a contact closure sensing the input Tx HOLD ACTUATOR System Prompts Configuration Totalizers Page 4 59 Parameter that selects an actuator which can suspend totalization when active Tx RESET ACTUATOR System Prompts Configuration Totalizers Page 4 58 Parameter that selects an actuator that will reset the total when active T
170. he same format applies for input simulated and derived variables except that aaaa does not apply The following is the 2 VALS at a time display format for process variables paaaannnnnn uuuuuu p Process Variable Number paaaannnnnn uuuuuu The following is the 2 VALS at a time display format for other variables IVm nnnnnn uuuuuu m Input Variable Number IVm nnnnnn uuuuuu SVm nnnnnn uuuuuu m Simulated Variable Number SVm nnnnnn uuuuuu DVmm nnnnnn uuuuuu mm Derived Variable Number DVmm nnnnnn uuuuuu The following is the 4 PVS at a time display format for process variables pannnnuuu pannnnuuu p Process Variable Number pannnnuuu pannnnuuu A a Highest Priority Active Alarm When 4 PVS at a time is selected all variables except PVs will be displayed using their respective 2 VALS at a time format The following is the 1 VAL at a time display format for totals display tag W w Preset Indicator nnnnnnnnnnn uuuuuu A P Preset Reached To maintain a consistant value and units placement the following is the 2 VAL at a time display format for totals display tag W w Preset Indicator nnnnnnnnnnn uuuuuu A P Preset Reached The number may or may not contain commas depending on the number format selected for total values Operator Messages are displayed as their configured two line message regardless of the format selected For contact closure inputs the nnnnnn field will contain the te
171. hen press the 1104 2 Press the to advance to the next parameter DECIMAL POSITION OF INPUT U S T 0 U R V CCx DECIMAL POSITION OF INPUT Press the to change then to Selections desired number then press the em f 0104 3 Press the to advance to the next parameter DECIMAL POSITION OF OUTPUT CCx DECIMAL POSITION OF OUTPUT Selections Press the to change then to desired number then press the ENTER Edition 3 4 16 Section 4 RevG 4 Press the to advance to the next parameter NUMBER OF POINTS CCx NUMBER OF POINTS 2 Press the to change then to desired number then press the E 5 Press ne to advance to the next parameter POINT PAIR 01 CCx POINT PAIR 01 0 gt U S T O M U R V S Selections Selections 999999 999999 decimal position 0 decimal position 0 9 9999 t 9 9999 decimal position 4 decimal position 4 Press the a change then to select digit to change ren EN ga desired digit then press the This will change the input value left number Then change the output value right number and then press the 6 Press the to advance to the next parameter POINT PAIR 02 CCx POINT PAIR 02 100 gt 100 Selections Selections 999999 999999 decimal position 0 decimal position 0 t 9 9999 9 9999 decimal position 4 decimal position 4 Follow the same procedure as in
172. hen press the ENTER 18 Press the to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY PROMPTS DISPLAY PROMPTS Press the a change then 10 desired choice then press the e ENTER Selections DISABLED ENABLED 19 Press the to advance to the next parameter OPERATOR INPUTS OPERATOR INPUTS Press the 2a change then 10 desired choice then press the Section 9 9 7 Edition 3 Rev G Selections DISABLED ENABLED 20 Press the to advance to the next parameter CONTROL STATE ACCESS only seen if CONTROL LER CONTROL STATE ACCESS DISABLED ENABLED Press the 2a change then to desired choice then press the ENTER 21 Press the to advance to the next parameter SYSTEM PROMPTS PASSWORD SYSTEM PROMPTS PASSWORD REQ Selections Press the a change to 0 to 999999 0 No password protection desired value then press the 22 Press the to advance to the next parameter ENABLES amp PASSWORDS PASSWORD ENABLES amp PASSWORDS PASSWORD Press the change non EN 10 desired value then press the f ENTER Selections 0 to 999999 0 No password protection Edition 3 9 8 Section 9 Rev G 23 Press the to advance to the next parameter CHART PROMPTS PASSWORD CHART PROMPTS PASSWORD Press the a change then to desired value then press the em 24 Press the to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY PROMPTS PASSWORD Se
173. hoice was selected but it would then begin to totalize again as the actuator would only reset it momentarily CONTINUOUS the other choice would cause the total to be reset when the ON YES 1 choice was selected but it would remain reset until the OFF NO 0 choice was selected as the actuator would be keeping it reset continuously NONE JUST CONTINUE Chart Prompts Chart Configuration Page 6 11 The choice for the parameter ACTION ON NEW CHART that does not print a range list or set of scales before it begins recording trend data NONE OFF One of the list of actuators which is effectively no selection This is the default or initial configuration for most actuator parameters It evaluates to false or 0 Normal Display mode The state the unit is in relative to what s in the display when it is not in the Display Prompts Chart Prompts or System Prompts In this state values and or messages are being displayed rather than prompts OFF STATE TEXT System Prompts Configuration Operator Inputs Page 4 83 Parameter that specifies the text that will be displayed at the left of the lower display when the Operator Input is shown in the Display Prompts When this choice is selected the corresponding actuator OP INP 1 through OP INP 12 will be setto false Typical text may be OFF NO STOP STOPPED HOLD etc OMxx ACTUATOR System Prompts Configuration Operator Messages Page 4 87 Parameter that selects an actuator which when t
174. iations for each direction of setpoint ramping 14 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter Pxx SP1 DEVIATION ON RAMP UP only if Guaranteed Soak is set to YES Selections 0 9999999 Press the MOD key to change then press the LEFT SCROLL UP DOWN as required to desired deviation value then press the ENTER key 15 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter Pxx SP1 DEVIATION ON RAMP DOWN only if Guaranteed Soak is set to YES Selections 0 9999999 Press the MOD key to change then press the LEFT SCROLL UP DOWN as required to desired deviation value then press the ENTER key Note Repeated for each setpoint configured 16 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter Pxx SEGMENTS LOOP COUNT Selections 0 9999 Press the MOD key to change then the LEFT SCROLL UP DOWN as required to desired loop count then press the ENTER key Segment Loop Count The unit will cycle through the segments the number of times specified by segment loop count before proceeding to the next phase which is specified by the next parameter One execute the segments once 17 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter Pxx WHEN SEGS DONE only seen when more than one profile has been specified Selections END and JOIN X X 1 16 Press the MOD key to change then press the LEFT SCROLL UP DOWN as required to desired choice then press the ENTER key 14 2 Section 14 When Segs Done Profiles may be joined togeth
175. ich change the controller states Note that although the default settings imply a one to one correspondence between control state access numbers and controller numbers this is not necessarily the case Up to four Control State Accesses may be configured and all four are initially set If all four are not to be used the unused should be changed to blank EXAMPLE Let s consider auto manual for controller 1 C1 The first would be using a remote contact closure input to switch between auto and manual control This method requires that an input be used for Switch Contact To configure set an unused INPUT TYPE RANGE to SWITCH CONTACT found in INPUTS part of CONFIGURATION then set C1 MANUAL ACTUATOR to SWx x number of Input Variable set earlier A second and possibly more convenient method of changing states would be the CONTROL STATE ACCESS programming capability The CONTROL STATE ACCESS capability is configured in CONFIGURATION and used via the m Set C1 MANUAL ACTUATOR found in CONTROLLERS to CA1F1 Next set CA1 LINE 1 TEXT found in CONTROL STATE ACCESS to CONTROLLER 1 DEFAULT CA1 LINE 2 TEXT to A M DEFAULT and CA1 F1 KEY USAGE to C1 AUTO MANUAL DEFAULT NOTE If only one control is being utilized it is key To configure suggested that the remaining prompts be blank otherwise they will be displayed Edition 3 13 2 Section 13 Rev G To utilize the CONTROL STATE ACCESS capability and select either AUTOMATIC o
176. ied by POWER FAIL ACTION or RECOVERY ACTION depending on the parameter specified by RECOVERY TIME LIMIT During profiling the current time is saved in non cleared memory every second During initialization the last time saved while the profile was running is compared to the current time If the unit was off for a time period greater than specified by RECOVERY TIME LIMIT RECOVERY ACTION parameter applies If the period of time is less than the RECOVERY TIME LIMIT POWER FAIL ACTION parameter applies POWER FAIL ACTION and RECOVERY ACTION specify what shall happen based upon the choice selection made CONTINUE requires no action the profile will continue at the point the profile was interrupted HOLD will place the profile in the HOLD condition and stop in the current segment ramp or dwell with the time remaining for the segment held at the last value before placed into HOLD ABORT will terminate the current running profile RESTART will cause the instrument to begin the profile from the beginning 24 Press the SCROLL key and the display advances to the next profile to be configured Section 14 14 3 Edition 3 Rev G 14 2 PROFILE SETTINGS To enter the Profile Settings section from the Normal Display press the SCROLL key until CONFIGURATION appears in the lower display line With CONFIGURATION in the lower display line press the DOWN key Press the SCROLL key until PROFILE SETTINGS appears in the lower display line Edition 3 Rev G
177. ified when ordered Valid choice of color depends on number of colors specified when ordered One color Red Two colors Red Green Three colors Red Green Blue or Four colors Red Green Blue Black or Violet Section 4 4 47 Edition 3 Rev G o JI mMm O JI OO Mm I o O JI O O mI 6 Press the O advance to the next parameter RECORDING METHOD Rx RECORDING METHOD DRAG MIN TO MAX Selections Press the a change then to INSTANTANEOUS VALUES CONNECT THE VALUES desired choice then press the DRAG MIN TO MAX AVERAGE VALUES CONNECT THE AVERAGES 7 Press the advance to the next parameter DECIMAL POSITION Rx DECIMAL POSITION 0 Press the a change then to 0 to 4 desired number then press ENTER 8 Press the advance to the next parameter CHART DIVISIONS Must be programmed Rx CHART DIVISIONS before any subsequent prompts RINGS 100 Selections 10 to 200 Press the a change then to desired value then press the 3 4 48 RevG Section 4 9 Press the advance to the next parameter ZONE 1 LOW Rx ZONE 1 LOW DIVISION 0 Press the a change then 8 desired value then press the 10 Press the advance to the next parameter ZONE 1 HIGH Rx ZONE 1 HIGH DIVISION 100 Selections 0 to 200 Press the a change then 8 desired digit then 2 7 8 desired value then press ne Section 4 4 49 Selections 0 to 200
178. ill be displayed no change being made to it Pressing the ENTER key will exit Modify and the new value will be displayed and entered into memory 3 3 7 SPECIAL KEYS five keys located below the display While in the Multiple Choice Selection the Special keys are used to select 1 of up to 5 choices from a choice line displayed directly above each key Edition 3 3 2 Section 3 Rev G 3 4 CHANGING PARAMETER SETTINGS MODIFY There are three types of parameters in the instrument values numbers text strings groups of characters and choices selections made by picking one of a group of displayed descriptions With a modifiable parameter description and its setting displayed pressing the MOD key places the unit in Modify where the setting can be modified 3 4 1 CHANGING VALUES If the setting is a value number the cursor will be positioned on the right most digit The LEFT ARROW and SCROLL keys will move the cursor left or right The UP and DOWN keys will increment or decrement the value with rollover and rollunder through all digits to the left of the cursor Pressing the ESC key exits Modify no change being made to the original value Pressing the ENTER key exits Modify and the new value will be displayed and entered into memory 3 4 2 CHANGING TEXT There are two ways to change or modify text The first Character Modify is accessed by the initial pressing of the MOD key and the second Character Selection is access
179. imal position 4 to desired number then press the Section 13 13 33 Edition 3 Rev G 6 Press the to advance to the next parameter OUTPUT 1 SHIFT Cx OUT 1 SHIFT Note Units correspond to Units 0 units configured in Process Variables Selections Press the to change then or 0 to 999999 decimal position 0 0 to 9 9999 to desired number then press the decimal position 4 7 Press the to advance to the next parameter OUTPUT 2 SHIFT only if Output 2 is used Cx OUT 2 SHIFT Note Units correspond to Units 0 units configured in Process Variables Selections Pr h 0 hange th 112 B 0 to 999999 1 12 ER B decimal position 0 0 to 9 9999 to desired number then press the decimal position 4 OUTPUT SHIFT represents an offset of the on off actuation points or proportional band relative to the normal position For example if two on off outputs are being used one for heating and one for cooling and a deadband of 2 is desired between the two set OUT 1 SHIFT to 1 and set OUT 2 SHIFT to 1 Edition 3 13 34 Section 13 RevG 8 Press the 8 advance to the next parameter INTEGRATION BAND only if proportional output Cx INTEGRATION BAND Note Units correspond to Units 100 units configured in Process Variables Selections 0 to 999999 decimal position 0 Press the to change then or 0 to 9 9999 decimal position 4 to desired number then press the INTEGRATION BAND sets the range wh
180. ing of this section page 4 61 4 1 9 LEDS In this section each of the available 8 individual LEDs can be configured to operate on any of the available actuators From the Normal Display press MC until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line If PASS WORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to Configu ration is allowed If CONFIGURATION is not displayed then Configuraiton has been disabled Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Configuration With CONFIGURATION in the display press the then until LEDS appears in the lower display line 1 Press to display LED NUMBER LED NUMBER Press the to change then to 1108 desired choice then press the Edition 3 4 66 Section 4 Rev G 2 Press to advance to the next parameter LED ACTUATOR LED x ACTUATOR NONE OFF Selections ON CONTINUOUS Press the to change then ANY ALARM ANY PROCESS ALARM as required to desired choice then A11 A12 A13 A14 A21 A22 A23 A24 A31 A32 A33 A34 A41 M2 M3 M4 INSTRUMENT ALARM press the CHART FULL OPINP1 OPINP2 OPINP3 OPINP4 OPINP5 OPINP6 OPINP7 OPINP8 OPINP9 OPINP 10 OPINP 11 OP INP 12 CHART CHANGED CHART ROTATION TREND DATA COLLECT ALT CHART SPEED DA1 DA2 DA3 DA4 DAS DA6 DA7 DA8 DA9 DA10 DA11 DA12 DA13 DA14 DA15 DA16 DA17 DA18 DA19 DA20 21 DA22 DA23 DA24 PRESET1 PRESET 2 PR
181. is Input 2 4 6 and 8 NOTE INPUT CONDITIONING JUMPERS MUST BE POSITIONED AS SHOWN FOR VOLT INPUT IN EITHER FIGURE 2 8 OR 2 8A DEPENDING ON WHICH CIRCUIT BOARD IS FITTED ALSO NOTE THERE IS NO SENSOR BREAK DETECTION FOR ZERO BASED VOLT INPUTS EXAMPLE 0 5V FIGURE 2 9 FIGURE 2 9A JU3 JU6 JU3 JU6 0 10V 0 10V 0 10V 0 10V 0 5V 0 5V 0 5V 0 5V 0 1V amp mV 0 1V amp mV 0 1V amp mV OV amp mV INPUT 1 3 5 7 INPUT INPUT2 4 6 8 INPUT 1 3 5 7 INPUT INPUT2 4 6 8 JU7 SPAN JU8 JU7 SPAN Jus NARROW e H 0 25 mV ee NARROW 9 WIDE elele else WIDE JE 0 100 0 100 LOW BF e LOW HK e VOLT VOLT n xl zgg igg JU3 JU6 JUS JU JU2 JU5 pa 9 suis ele ele JU16 NOTE Terminal Block 1 Terminal 1 is on the RIGHT Terminal Block 2 Terminal 1 is on the LEFT Section 2 2 11 Edition 3 Rev G 2 3 7 CURRENT CONNECTIONS Note Up to four Input Boards may be present stacked 4 high Input Board 1 is the bottom board Two versions of Input Board s may be found see Figure 2 10 and Figure 2 10A Input Board 1 is used for Input 1 and if equipped Input 2 Input Board 2 is used for Input 3 and Input 4 if equipped Input Board 3 is for Input 5 and Input 6 Input Board 4 is for Input 7 and Input 8 Connect positive leg to terminal 1 and connect negative leg to terminal 2 on the Input Board s to be cur
182. is at TB2 Transmitter Output 3 is at TB3 and Transmitter Output 4 is at TB4 If an isolated 24 VDC regulated transmitter power supply has been specified the connections should be made as shown FIGURE 2 15A TBX INPUT N Gta O 2 Wire Transmitter The connections should be made as shown Terminal block TB1 is used for RS 232 Figure 2 15B and terminal block TB3 is used for RS 485 Figure 2 15c Jumpers JP1 and JP3 must be positioned as shown 2 4 5 COMMUNICATIONS FIGURE 2 15B RS 232 WELLE JP1 OO JP3 OIIO O Rx Tx Gmd Edition 3 2 16 Section 2 Rev FIGURE 2 15 Section 2 RS 485 TES 7 JP1 O OO JP3 e Network e Continuation If Applicable Towards Computer 2 17 Edition 3 Rev G Section 3 The Basics of Recorder Operation 3 1 POWER UP After proper installation the following will occur when power is applied All segments in the vacuum fluorescent display will light then All the display LEDs will light then The instrument tag and the current time and date will appear When completed the instrument begins normal display mode as configured in Display Progr
183. is is a reminder that normal recording will not commence 6 2 CHART CONFIGURATION To enter Chart configuration from the Normal Display press the until SELECT appears in the upper display line and CHART CONFIGURATION appears in the lower display line If CHART KEY DISABLED ap pears in the lower display line refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Chart Prompts If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to the Chart Select is allowed 1 Press to display CHART SIZE Note When changing chart size calibration of CHART SIZE the instrument to the chart is required See 12in chart calibration in Section 11 Press the a change then to desired choice then press the EM Selection 11 10 12in 2 Press the OR advance to the next parameter CHART TYPE USED CHART TYPE USED RINGS ONLY Selection P h h h RINGS LINES SCALES ee j RINGS AND TIMELINES RINGS ONLY desired choice then press liil Edition 3 6 2 Section 6 Rev G 3 Press the advance to the next parameter CHART TAG CHART TAG UNIT 1 Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text Page 3 3 for Selection instructions Text 4 Press the advance to the next parameter NORMAL SPEED NORMAL SPEED 24 HOUR Press the a change ren ad 8 noun CUR to desired choice then press 24 HOUR 48 HO
184. is seen in the lower display line If PASS WORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to Configurat allowed If CONFIGURATION is not displayed then Configuration has been disabled Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Configuration With CONFIGURATION in the display press the then the until OPERATOR MESSAGES appears in the lower display line 1 Press the to display OPERATOR MESSAGE OPERATOR MESSAGE Selections Press the change then to 1 to 12 desired number then press the 0 P 3 R A T R M 3 S S A G 2 Press the to advance to the next parameter COPY INITIALIZE OMxx COPY INITIALIZE NO Press the change then to desired choice then press the Choose YES if the parameters to be programmed the same as another OPERATOR MESSAGE already Selections NO YES programmed Section 4 4 89 Edition 3 Rev G 0 P R A T 0 R M S S A G S If selection was NO proceed to step 3 If selection was YES OMxx COPY FROM OM 0 z INITIALIZE Press the to change to the desired Operator Message to be copied from operator message to be copied from 0 FACTORY DEFAULT Edition 3 4 90 Rev G Section 4 3 Press the to advance to the next parameter ACTUATOR OMxx ACTUATOR NONE OFF Selections NONE OFF ON CONTINUOUS ANY ALARM ANY
185. isions divisions divisions POSIT ON ERROR division division division division FILTER Edition 3 Rev G seconds 3 26 seconds Section 3 Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration TOTALIZERS Parameter TOTAL 1 TOTAL 2 TOTAL 3 TOTAL 4 DISPLAY TAG INPUT VALUE TIME BASE TOTAL IS FLOW DISPLAY UNITS DECIMAL POSITION DISPLAY OPTION DISPLAY FORMAT TOTALIZER TYPE TOTALIZER PRESET LOW FLOW CUTOFF RESET ACTUATOR HOLD ACTUATOR PULSED OUT PULSE EVERY Section 3 3 27 Edition 3 RevG Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration TIMERS Parameter DISPLAY TAG TIMER TYPE TIME FORMAT TIMER PERIOD RESET ACTUATOR DISPLAY OPTION Configuration LEDS Parameter LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 ACTUATOR Parameter LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8 ACTUATOR eee Edition 3 3 28 Section 3 Rev Parameter RELAY USAGE Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration RELAYS ACTUATOR T P VALUE CYCLE TIME Parameter RELAY USAGE seconds seconds seconds ACTUATOR T P VALUE CYCLE TIME Section 3 seconds seconds 3 29 seconds Edition 3 Rev G Software Reference Record Sheet Configuration CURRENT OUTPUTS Parameter SOURCE RANGE LOW RANGE HIGH OUTPUT RANGE OUTPUT ON ERROR
186. ithin the trend area Trend and time lines will not be overwritten or lost Since it may take considerable time for the instrument to record a message three messages will be queued with a fourth queue providing a QUEUE OVERFLOW message All messages actuated while the queue is full are lost Application A user would like to print a message indicating that Alarm 1 on Process Value 2 has tripped Configuration Chart Message Chart Message 2 CM2 Actuator A21 Alarm 1 Process Value 2 CM2 Message Text ALARM 1 PRESSURE HI CMe Value 1 IV2 Input Value for Pressure CM2 Value 2 PV2 Process Value for Alarm CM2 Time Date Stamp YES Operation During Normal Operation if the pressure exceeds the alarm setpoint the alarm A21 will go on and at the same time the actuator A21 will trigger the chart message ALARM 1 PRESSURE HI and print the value of IV2 the actual pressure and PV2 the process value used to trigger the alarm Appendix D D 3 Edition 3 Rev G EXAMPLE 6 Latching Alarm Configuration Process Variables Process Variable PV1 Display Tag PV1 Input A11 Alarm Type A11 Hysteresis LEDs LED Number LED 8 Actuator Relays Relay Number Relay 4 Usage Relay 4 Actuator Derived Actuators Derived Actuator DA1 Item 1 DA1 Item 2 DA1 Item 3 DA1 Item 4 DA1 Item 5 DA1 Item 6 DA1 Item 7 1 users choice IV1 Process High 3 DA1 4 State or On Off DA1 1 Not Reset And DA1 Or A11 E
187. ition 3 RevG SEGMENT 3 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss PROFILE NUMBER Parameter SEGMENT 6 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 7 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 8 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL GUARANTEED SOAK SP1 DEVIATION RAMP UP SP1 DEVIATION RAMP DN SP2 DEVIATION RAMP UP SP2 DEVIATION RAMP DN SP3 DEVIATION RAMP UP SP3 DEVIATION RAMP DN SP4 DEVIATION RAMP UP SP4 DEVIATION RAMP DN SEGMENTS LOOP COUNT WHEN SEGMENTS DONE PROFILE LOOP COUNT END ACTION Parameter ABORT ACTION POWER FAIL ACTION RECOVERY TIME LIMIT RECOVERY ACTION Edition 3 14 14 Section 14 RevG Parameter DESCRIPTION SETPOINTS TO PROFILE NUMBER OF SEGMENTS SEGMENT 1 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 2 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 3 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOIN
188. key to change then LEFT SCROLL UP DOWN as required to desired choice then press the ENTER key Profile Abort Actuator If a transition is detected on the Profile Abort Actuator and a profile is active the profile is then aborted 5 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter PROFILE HOLD ACTUATOR See Actuator List for selections Press the MOD key to change then LEFT SCROLL UP DOWN as required to desired choice then press the ENTER key Profile Hold Actuator A positive transition of the Profile Hold Actuator places an active profile in hold while a negative transition places it in run While in hold the ramp dwell timer stops 6 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter PROFILE ADVANCE ACTUATOR See Actuator List for selections Press the MOD key to change then LEFT SCROLL UP DOWN as required to desired choice then press the ENTER key Profile Advance Actuator A positive transition on the Profile Advance actuator will advance the profile to the next step The ramp time remaining or dwell time remaining will be set with a few seconds so that the profile will step quickly to the next segment yet do so without abruptly changing the current segment or profile 14 4 Section 14 Section 14 ACTUATOR LIST 7 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter PROFILE DISPLAY OPTION Selections are NOT DISPLAYED IN CONTINUOUS MODE IN SEQUENTIAL MODE or INBOTH MODES Press the MOD key to chan
189. key to change then UP DOWN as required to desired choice then press the ENTER key 20 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter Pxx ABORT ACTION Selections are OFF EVENTS OFF Unit turns all outputs off or 0 including the events OFF EVENTS SAME Unit turns control outputs off or 0 but keeps the events in the same condition they were on remain on off remain off CONTROL EVENTS SAME Unit reverts to control with the events the same Press the MOD key to change then UP DOWN as required to desired choice then press the ENTER key 21 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter Pxx POWERFAIL ACTION Selections are CONTINUE HOLD ABORT or RESTART Press the MOD key to change then UP DOWN as required to desired choice then press the ENTER key 22 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter Pxx RECOVERY TIME LIMIT displayed as hhh mm ss where h is hours m is minutes and s is seconds Press the MOD key to change then UP DOWN to desired number then press the ENTER key NOTE This procedure will need to be performed for each segment of time hours minutes and seconds 23 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter Pxx RECOVERY ACTION Selections are CONTINUE HOLD ABORT or RESTART Press the MOD key to change then LEFT SCROLL UP DOWN as required to desired choice then press the ENTER key Power Failure If power fails the unit will respond based upon the parameters specif
190. l position 0 9 9999 decimal position 4 Press the change then to desired number then press the 24 Press the to advance to the next parameter FEEDFORWARD LOW only if FEEDFORWARD was selected as CONTROL TYPE Cx FEEDFORWARD LOW Selections 999999 decimal position 0 9 9999 decimal position 4 Press the 2a change then to desired number then press ve 25 Press the to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY SELECTED SETPOINT Cx DISP SELECTED SP IN BOTH MODES Selections NOT DISPLAYED IN CONTINOUS MODE IN SEQUENTIAL MODE IN BOTH MODES Edition 3 Rev G Press the a change then to desired choice then press the Section 13 26 Press the to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY RAMPED SETPOINT Cx DISPLAY RAMPED SP NOT DISPLAYED Selections 4 NOT DISPLAYED nee ne EUROS a m IN CONTINOUS MODE IN e desired choice then press the 27 Press the to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY OUTPUTS only if either output is propor tional Cx DISPLAY OUTPUTS NOT DISPLAYED eN n NOT DISPLAYED Press the n to change then r1 to IN CONTINOUS MODE IN SEQUENTIAL MODE IN BOTH MODES desired choice then press the 28 Press the and the display advances to the next controller to be programmed Refer to the beginning of this section page 13 3 Section 13 13 17 Edition 3 Rev G 13 2 CONTROL SETPOINTS There are 8 Control Setpoi
191. le to be copied from 3 Press the 8 advance to the next parameter DISPLAY PVx DISPLAY TAG PROCESS VAL X ud Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for ex instructions Section 4 4 33 Edition 3 Rev G P R 0 S S V R L 3 S 4 Press the advance to the next parameter INPUT TYPE PVx INPUT NONE USED Press 9 change then NONE DES to desired choice then press IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4 IV5 IV6 IV7 IV8 PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4 DV1 DV2 the f DV4 DV5 DV6 DV7 DV8 DV9 DV10 DV11 DV12 Additional selections for use with controller option CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4 SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12 TOTAL1 TOTAL2 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22 TOTAL3 TOTAL4 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32 SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4 OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT42 If NONE USED was selected no other prompts for PROCESS VALUE X will be seen Refer back to step 1 page 4 32 P R S S V A R L E S 5 Press the 8 advance to the next parameter DISPLAY UNITS PVx DISPLAY UNITS F Press 9 change then to desired choice then press the Selections C F OTHER Edition 3 4 34 Section 4 RevG 6 If OTHER was selected in DISPLAY UNITS press the to advance to the next parameter OTHER UNITS PVx OTHER UNITS F Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for instructions Selections Text 7 Pre
192. lections NONE OFF ON CONTINUOUS mon ANY ALARM Press the to change then ANY PROCESS ALARM 11 A12 A13 A14 to desired choice then press A21 A22 A23 24 A31 A32 A33 A34 m CHART FULL thg i OPINP1 OPINP2 OPINP3 OPINP4 OPINP5 OPINP6 OPINP7 OPINP8 OPINP9 10 OP INP 11 OP INP 12 CHART CHANGED CHART ROTATION TREND DATA COLLECT ALT CHART SPEED DA1 DA2 DA4 DA5 DA6 DA7 DA8 DA9 DA10 DA11 DA12 DA13 DA14 DA15 DA16 DA17 DA18 DA19 DA20 DA21 DA22 DA23 DA24 PRESET1 PRESET 2 PRESET3 PRESET 4 TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2 TOTAL TOTAL PO4 TIME 1 TIME DATE 1 TIME 2 TIME DATE 2 TIME 1 TO TIME 2 TIME DATE 1 TO 2 TIMER1 TIMER 2 TIMER3 TIMER 4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 COMM TRIGGER 1 Additional selections for use with controller option COMM TRIGGER 2 OUTPUT11 OUTPUT12 COMM TRIGGER 3 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT22 COMM TRIGGER 4 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT32 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 OUTPUT41 OUTPUT42 RESET MOD ENTER CAIF1 CAIF2 CAIF3 ON THE HOUR CA1F4 CA1F5 DAY OF WEEK CA2F1 CA2F2 CA2F3 DAY OF MONTH CA2F4 CA2F5 RELAY 1 RELAY 2 CA3F1 CA3F2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 CA3F4 CA3F5 RELAY 5 RELAY 6 CA4F1 CA4F2 CA4F3 RELAY 7 RELAY 8 CA4F4 CA4F5 Section 6 6 9 Edition 3 Rev G 19 Press the to advance to the next parameter COLLECT DATA ACTUATR COLLECT DATA ACTUATR CHART ROTATION Selections NONE OFF ON CONTINUOUS Press the a change then a ANY ALARM ANY PROCESS ALARM MAE qe Bua desired choice
193. lections 0 to 999999 0 No password protection DISPLAY PROMPTS PASSWORD Press vE change 4 to Selections 0 to 999999 desired value then press the 0 No password protection 25 To exit press the Section 9 9 9 Edition 3 Rev G Section 10 Test Test describes all possible diagnostic tests built into the recorder From the Normal Display depress the until TESTS appears in the lower display line If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to Test is allowed If TESTS is not displayed then Test has been disabled Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instruc tions to enable Test A list of available tests and their purpose are shown in Table 10 1 TABLE 10 1 AVAILABLE TEST Relays Used to verify that all LEDs Relays and or Solid State Relay Drivers SSRD are working correctly Display Used to verify the display is functional Keypad Used to verify that all keys are functional LEDs Used to verify that the functionality of the LEDs Chart Demonstration Used to demonstrate chart capabilites CAUTION When this test is iniitated any parameter values previously programmed in Chart Configuration and Recorders are replaced with the demonstration values A D Reset Counter Displays the number of times the A D counter has been reset FACTORY USE ONLY A D Raw Hex Counts Displays raw counts for inputs and grounds FAC
194. ll show NO Select YES to perform the calibration Connect the appropriate one of the following inputs to the input terminals of the input being calibrated 100 ohm resistor RTD Inputs 0 0 mA DC Current Inputs 0 0 mV DC TC or mV DC Inputs 0 0 V DC Volt Inputs jen Wait one minute then depress ne key Step 7 Connect the appropriate one of the following inputs to the input terminals of the input being calibrated 277 ohm resistor RTD Inputs 20 00 mA DC Current Inputs 25 00 mV DC TC or 0 25 mV DC Inputs 100 00 mV DC TC or 0 254 mV DC Inputs 1 00 V DC 1 V DC Inputs 10 00 V DC 10 V DC Inputs Wait one minute then depress the key Rev G Step 8 Repeat steps 1 through 8 for each input to be calibrated 11 2 COLD JUNCTION CALIBRATION Step 1 With INPUT CALIBRATION on the lower display line press the to enter the Input Calibration The upper display will display CALIBRATE INPUT and the lower display line will display IV1 If other than IV1 or IV2 is to be calibrated depress and select the input number for which it is desired to calibrate Note There exists only one CJC sensor per input board or for every two input channels Step 2 Depress and the upper display line will display IVx CAL BOARD TYPE x input number selected and the lower display line will display TC VOLT or RTD Select TC VOLT Step 3 Depress and IVx CAL WHAT RANGE should appear in the upper display line Depress then until TC NARROW TC WIDE are displaye
195. lock itself several other items can be configured SETPOINTS CONTROL STATE AC CESS and TUNING Located in the CONFIGURATION section SETPOINTS where setpoints are defined and labeled and CONTROL STATE ACCESS used to configure prompting accessed by the n key providing easy assess to the most often used control activities TUNING PARAMETERS included as a section of the SYSTEM PROMPTS is accessed via the key from the normal display Section 13 13 1 Edition 3 Rev G Up to 8 setpoints can be configured Each has a variable text prompt units decimal position limits and normal display display option Whenever the PROMPT TEXT as configured in SETPOINTS is not blank the setpoint will be displayed in the n key prompts The setpoints are not inherently associated with a controller so they can also be used for ratios direct drive outs to a current output or any other purposes Setpoint changes can be inhibited via the ENABLES and PASS WORDS The SETPOINTS included in the 8 the operator changeable values The setpoints included the normal display are for display purposes only and both the currently selected setpoint and the internal ramping setpoint can be displayed Control State Access provides an easy and quick way to change controller states automatic to manual local setpoint to remote setpoint via the Display key When the default control actuator settings are used they affect the actuators wh
196. ly go into the modify mode In this prompt section use the key to advance to the next prompt without modifying the current parameter 1 If instrument is a Controller the following prompts may appear up to 4 times one for each CONTROL STATE ACCESS CA configured in CONTROL STATE ACCESS section of CONFIGURATION The prompts are visible for CAx if CAx LINE 1 TEXT is not blank In the description of these prompts x is the CA number 1 4 and if the defaults are not changed the controller number tttttttttttttttttttt default CONTROLLER x STATES VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV Automatic Modify Mode AMM used default A M SP1 SP2 L R The t t field is the configured CAx LINE 1 TEXT and the v v field is the configured CAx LINE 2 TEXT Note that although AMM is in use none of the fields in this prompt are modifiable and none will be flashing 2 When the above prompt is displayed if any function keys for CAx have usage other than NOT USED pressing that key will display the following tttttttttttttttttttt default CONTROLLER x STATE CC AMM used The t t field is the configured CAx Fn LINE 1 TEXT where n is the function key number 1 5 The cc field is a two item choice which causes the CAxFn actuator to be cleared left choice or set right choice The choice text will be as configured if the usage is CUSTOM otherwise it will be one of AUTOMATIC MANUAL SP1 SP2 or LOCAL REMOTE Section 5 5 Edition 3 Rev G 3 When this promp
197. mber then press the Step 2 Press the and the upper display line will display IVx CAL BOARD TYPE x input number selected and the lower display line will display TC VOLT If the input to be calibrated is TC VOLT mA press the to move to the next step If the input to be calibrated is RTD press then F5 then Step 3 IVX CAL WHAT RANGE should be in the upper display line and OFF NO INPUT should be in the lower display line To calibrate press the then UP DOWN LEFT SCROLL as required to select the input range to be calibrated per Table 11 2 then press ENTER TABLE 11 2 RANGE SELECT Select IF Input Is TC WIDE TC and not T R S or B TC NARROW TC and other than above RTD RTD mA CURRENT 25 mV mV and maximum is 25 mV or less 100 mV mV and maximum is 100 mV or less 1 VOLT Volt and maximum is 1 Volt or less 10 VOLT Volt and maximum is 10 Volts or less Edition 3 11 2 Section 11 Rev G Step 4 Be sure that the jumpers on the Input Board for the Input being calibrated are positioned as shown in Table 11 3 and Figure 11 1 or Table 11 3A and Figure 11 1A depending on which circuit board is fitted TABLE 11 3 INPUT BOARD JUMPER POSITIONS INPUT 1 3 5 7 INPUT 2 4 6 8 JU3 JU7 JU11 JU15 JU4 JU5 JU6 JU8 JU12 JU16 P JU1 c c TC NARROW TC WIDE RTD mA 25 mV 100 mV 1 VOLT 10 VOLT Cccccucc rr rcruxx gx O U U U UC UTU rZ
198. mber of divisions or rings between printed scale values The values printed are calculated by the instrument If the SCALE INTERVAL parameter is zero no scale values are printed but the RECORDER TAG will be printed If the SCALE INTERVAL parameter value equals the number of divisions in the zone scale values will be printed at each end only Scale lines Scale lines are printed as a series of dots closely spaced to form a solid line and are printed only in the area of the chart zone or portion of chart span used for the respective trend line The scale lines are printed on top of major time lines The number of scale lines printed on the chart is determined by the MAJOR TIME PERIODS parameter the number of BLANK MAJOR TIME PERIODS and the number of trend lines being recorded The color of the scale line is the same as the respective trend line Scale values The set of values printed next to the scale line which identify the engineering values corresponding to the respec tive rings on the chart usually evenly spaced at multiples of 10 divisions or rings SELECT A COLOR Chart Prompts Chart Configuration Page 6 8 A choice for MATCH SELECT prompts which specifies that the corresponding time line time or date and chart tag should always be printed in a fixed color The color is selected at the next prompt Appendix C C 11 Edition 3 Rev G Sensor break While there are sensor break jumpers JU1 and JU4 sensor break and out of range co
199. n in addition to the normal configuring required for the Recorder functions other parameters such as CONTROLLERS SETPOINTS and TUNING PARAMETERS will need to be configured in order for the instrument to operate properly Along with the above additional choices will appear in the selection list for certain prompts found elsewhere in this manual The main part of the control capability is provided by the controller functional block The controller functional block is configured in the CONTROLLERS section of CONFIGURATION The functional block provides the following capabilities 1 dual output ON OFF and PID automatic and manual control 2 bumpless and balanceless automatic manual transfer 3 auto manual control switching local remote switching and dual setpoint switching 4 setpoint ramping 5 automatic transfer 6 slew rate output ramping and 7 setpoint selecting The main first second and remote setpoint sources are selectable The actuators for auto manual control switching local remote switching and dual setpoint switching are selectable The following items can be selected for display in the normal display mode the selected setpoint which is the current setpoint value before ramping the ramped setpoint which is the internal setpoint value after ramping is applied which is used as the control point and the outputs Besides the controller b
200. n accordance with the factory instructions Users are responsible for the suitability of the products to their application There is no warranty against damage resulting from corrosion misapplication improper specifications or other operating condition beyond our control Claims against carriers for damage in transit must be filed by the buyer This warranty is void if the purchaser uses non factory approved replacement parts and supplies or if the purchaser attempts to repair the product themselves or through a third party without factory authorization Returns The factory s sole and exclusive obligation and buyer s sole and exclusive remedy under the above warranty is limited to repairing or replacing at the factory s option free of charge the products which are reported in writing to the factory at its main office The factory is to be advised of return requests during normal business hours and such returns are to include a statement of the observed deficiency The buyer shall pre pay shipping charges for products returned and the factory or its representative shall pay for the return of the products to the buyer Section 1 1 13 Edition 3 Rev G Section 2 Installation and Wiring Read these instructions carefully before proceeding with installation and operation Electrical code requirements and safety standards should be observed Installation should be performed by qualified personnel 2 1 MOUNTING Panel and Surface de
201. n is allowed If CONFIGURATION is not displayed then Configuration has been disabled Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Configuration With CONFIGURATION in the display press the then the until TOTALIZERS appears in the lower display line 1 Press the to display TOTALIZER NUMBER T 0 L Z E R S TOTALIZER NUMBER 1104 Press the a change then to desired number then press ENTER 2 Press the advance to the next parameter COPY INITIALIZE Tx COPY INITIALIZE NO Press change then to desired choice then press m ENTER Selections NO YES Choose YES if the parameter to be programmed are the same as another TOTALIZER already programmed Edition 3 4 54 Section 4 Rev G If selection was NO proceed to siep 3 If selection was YES Tx COPY FROM TOTAL 0 z INITIALIZE Press the to change to the totalizer Totalizer to be copied from 0 FACTORY DEFAULT number to be copied from T ie T A L Z 3 R S 3 Press MO to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY TAG Tx DISPLAY TAG TOTAL X Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for instructions Selections Text Section 4 4 55 Edition 3 Rev G 4 Press the to advance to the next parameter INPUT VALUE Tx INPUT VALUE NONE USED Press the to change then Selections j j i NONE USED as required to desired choice then IV
202. nce to the next parameter DATE PEN COLOR DATE PEN COLOR RED Note Valid choice of color Selections 7 depends on number of BLUE Press the to change then to colors specified when ordered One color BLACK desired choice then press the Red Two colors Red VIOLET Green Three colors Red Green Blue or Four colors Red Green Blue Black or Violet Section 6 6 7 Edition 3 Rev G 15 Press the advance to the next parameter CHART TAG PEN COLOR CHART TAG PEN COLOR RED Note Valid choice of color depends on number of colors specified when ordered One color Selections woo Red Two colors Red BLUE Press the to change then to Green Three colors GREEN Red Cresi ilie cor Four desired choice then press colors Red Green Blue VIOLET Black or Violet 16 Press ine db to advance to the next parameter ACTION ON NEW CHART ACTION ON NEW CHART NONE JUST CONTINUE Selections woo Er NONE JUST CONTINUE Press the change then to PRINT RANGE LIST PRINT SCALES desired choice then press 17 Press 5 to advance to the next parameter STOP AFTER 1 REV STOP AFTER 1 REV NO Press the change then to desired choice then press lil ENTER Edition 3 6 8 RevG Selections NO YES Section 6 18 Press the to advance to the next parameter ROTATE CHART ACTUATR ROTATE CHART ACTUATR CHART ROTATION Se
203. nd Derived Actuator 1 will be true when A11 is true OR when DA 1 is true AND the Reset Key is not true To cause Derived Actuator 1 to be false press the Reset key providing the process has gone below the alarm set point Note The LED 8 and Relay 4 will remain latched until the Reset Key is pressed although the display will no longer display the H or the g global indicator Edition 3 Rev G D 4 Appendix D EXAMPLE 7 Latching High Alarm Latched Open Configuration Process Variables Process Variable PV1 Display Tag PV1 Input A11 Alarm Type LEDs LED Number LED Actuator Relay Relay Number Relay Usage Relay Actuator Derived Actuators Derived Actuator DA1 Item 1 DA1 Item 2 DA1 Item DA1 Item 4 DA1 Item 5 DA1 Item 6 DA1 Item 7 Derived Actuator DA2 Item 1 DA2 Item 2 DA2 Item 3 Appendix D users choice users choice users choice Process High users choice A11 users choice State or On Off DA2 NOT RESET AND DA1 A11 END NOT DA1 END D 5 Edition 3 Rev G Appendix Accuracy Tables LIN FACTORY REF LIN DEVIATION RESOL ACC Y CAL C C C bit 0 1200 0 20 0 32 A 0 12 0 066 200 0 i 0 08 0 56 0 02 0 097 0 400 0 05 0 33 0 04 0 017 200 0 0 16 0 08 0 56 0 02 0 024 0 1370 0 62 0 26 0 40 0 14 0 095 250 0 1 05 0 30 0 78 0 03 0 159 0 500 0 15 0 08 0 39 0 05 0 023 250 0 0 26 0 30 0 78 0 03 0 040 0 1000 0 33 0 19 0 28 0 10 0 050
204. nditions are actually determined and handled by the software When either occurs the software will drive the input value to 99999 or 99999 based upon whether SENSOR BREAK is software configured for UPSCALE or DOWN SCALE Any outputs will react accordingly Out of range is defined as being more than 5 out of the span established by RANGE LIMIT LOW and RANGE LIMIT HIGH For 5 or 10 volt and current inputs the analog signal goes to zero when there is a sensor break due to voltage divider or shunt resistors For sensor break detection to work on these input types the INPUT RANGE LOW analog signal low and or RANGE LIMIT LOW engineering units low parameters must be set high enough such that at zero volts mA the resultant value will be at least 5 below the span established by RANGE LIMIT LOW and RANGE LIMIT HIGH SIMULATED VARIABLES System Prompts Configuration Page 4 98 Prompts section that configures up to four SVs Simulated Variables that can be used to simulate an input primarily for demonstration purposes The functions available are sin wave square wave spikes or sawtooth SPAN 1 HIGH System Prompts Configuration Recorders Page 4 48 Parameter that specifies the trend value corresponding to the top of zone 1 This parameter also specifies the bottom of zone 2 if two zones are used SPAN 1 LOW System Prompts Configuration Recorders Pag 4 48e Parameter that specifies the trend value corresponding to t
205. nes as needed and resume trending If the interruption lasts long enough such that no data would be printed between successive major time divisions the divisions will not be printed When power is restored the chart is marked with an arrow to indicate the point of power interuption Edition 3 3 8 Section 3 Rev G 3 8 2 NEW CHART PRINTING REQUIREMENTS The following ACTION ON NEW CHART options are provided NONE JUST CONTINUE PRINT RANGE LIST PRINT SCALES The following example illustrates the format used if PRINT RANGE LIST has been configured This method would be selected to reduce the time between chart installation and initial trend recording This Range List corresponds to the example found at the end of this section Line Print Description Color 1 FLOW 1 Recorder Tag Black 2 0 400 GPM Span Units Black 3 TEMP 1 Recorder Tag Blue 4 20 120 FNL Span Units Blue 5 PH 1 Recorder Tag Green 6 0 14 PH NL Span Units Green 7 ALARM 1 Recorder Tag Red 8 0 1 NL Span Units Red If the scale is other than a simple 0 to 100 of chart with one zone NL will follow the units to indicate non linear If PRINT SCALES has been configured the instrument will proceed to print as needed per the chart format time lines scale lines scale values units and recorder tag for each recording pen which is configured The time date and chart tag will not be printed during this process The chart will be advanced to the correct
206. ng Values 3 4 2 Changing Text 3 4 3 Changing Choices 3 4 4 Copy lnitialize 3 4 5 Passwords 3 4 6 Enables 3 5 The Display 3 6 General 3 7 Display Details 3 8 Chart Details Qo C CO CO CO Qo CO CO CO CO Co CO CO CO Q amp amp amp amp amp G GoOdO0O01ImnNImINImIITmI 3 7 Edition 3 4 Rev G Prefix amp Table of Contents 3 8 1 Chart Printing Interruptions 3 8 2 New Chart Printing Requirements 3 8 3 Example Chart 3 8 4 Sequence of Events 3 9 Getting Started 3 10 Quick Start Procedure SECTION 4 CONFIGURATION 4 1 Entering Configuration 4 1 1 Inputs 4 1 2 Constants 4 1 3 Custom Curves 4 1 4 Derived Variables 4 1 5 Process Variables 4 1 6 Recorders 4 1 7 Totalizers 4 1 8 Timers 4 1 9 LEDs 4 1 10 Relays 4 1 11 Current Outputs 4 1 12 Instrument Settings 4 1 13 Derived Actuators 4 1 14 Operator Inputs 4 1 15 Operator Messages 4 1 16 Chart Messages 4 1 17 Simulated Variables SECTION 5 DISPLAY PROGRAMMING SECTION 6 CHART PROMPTS 6 1 Change Chart 6 2 Chart Configuration SECTION 7 ALARM SETTINGS SECTION 8 ACTION TIME SETTINGS SECTION 9 ENABLES amp PASSWORDS SECTION 10 TEST SECTION 11 CALIBRATION SECTION 12 APPENDIX A Board Layouts B Ranges C Reference Section D Examples E Accuracy Tables Prefix amp Table of Contents PAGE 3 8 3 9 3 9 3 12 3 13 3 14 4 1 4 1 4 14 4 15 4 18 4 32 4 43 4 52 4 61 4 64 4 66 4 69 4 72 4 78 4 81
207. ng properly A milliamp meter is required to perform this test Step 1 With mA OUTPUT in the lower display line depress the and INITIATE mA OUT TEST appears in the upper display line and NO appears in the lower display line Depress select YES then depress to start the test Step 2 SELECT mA OUTPUT will appear in the upper display line 1 2 3 4 will appear in the lower display line To select output to be tested depress the key directly under the desired output number Step 3 Connect the milliamp meter across the output terminals being tested Be sure to observe proper polarity when connecting the meter terminal 1 is positive Use the to increase or decrease the current output in 1 mA steps from 0 to 22 mA Edition 3 10 4 Section 10 Rev G Step 4 The current output reading should be equal to the displayed value Step 5 To exit the test depress iil and the instrument will return to the normal display Section 10 10 5 Edition 3 RevG Section 11 Calibration Calibration describes all possible field calibration procedures for the recorder as well as methods of invoking default program and calibration values The procedures described include the input and range calibration as well as chart calibration From the Normal Display press the until CALIBRATION appears in the lower display line If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to Calib
208. ng range 6 Resolution on thermocouples and RTDs is derived as a function of the input voltage range and dV dT Section 1 1 9 Edition 3 Rev G OTHER INPUT SPECIFICATIONS Processing Value Cutoff Sensor Fault Detection Sensor Break Transmitter Power Supplies RECORDING Pen Type Pen Colors Chart Size Chart Drive Chart Rotation Recorded Values Recording Methods Action on New Chart Chart Messages RECORDING PERFORMANCE Chart Recording Accuracy Chart Rotation Accuracy OPERATOR INTERFACE Display Status Indicators Keypad Display Formats Display Modes Operator Messages Operator Inputs ALARMS Number Type Hysteresis ON OFF OUTPUTS On Off Output Actuators Square root and exponential functions for linear inputs None at value to zero below value to zero near zero Sensor break on all TCs RTDs 1 volt 1 to 5 volt 4 20mA and millivolt inputs Sensor high and low on all inputs 5 above or below range Upscale or downscale Up to four isolated 25mA 24VDC supplies available Disposable 4 pen fiber tip marker assembly Red green blue and black 10 11 12 12 11 875 actual size DC stepper motor 6 to 9999 hours per revolution Any of over 20 values can be trended recorded Drag pen simulation instantaneous value connect the values average value connect the averages Print scales print range list begin normal recording Twelve 0 3 of chart span reference accuracy t 0 2 minutes f
209. nge the correction left number Then change the value at which the correction ENTER will occur right number and press m ENTER 23 Press MC to advance to the next parameter INPUT CORRECT 2 not seen if SWITCH CONTACT or COM was selected IVx INPUT CORRECT 2 0 AT 100 Selections Selections 999999 999999 decimal position 0 decimal position 0 t 9 9999 9 9999 decimal position 4 decimal position 4 Press the am change to select digit to change then H desired digit then press the This will change the correction left number Then change the value at which the correction ENTER will occur right number and press e Section 4 4 11 Edition 3 Rev G 24 Press the to advance to the next parameter VALUE FILTER IVx VALUE FILTER 0 SECONDS Selections Press change then gae then ga desired value then press 25 Press the to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY OPTION 0 to 9999 seconds 02 IVx DISPLAY OPTION IN BOTH MODES Selections NOT DISPLAYED Press the to change then ud D4 to IN CONTINUOUS MODE IN SEQUENTIAL MODE desired choice then press the fewer IN BOTH MODES aiii Edition 3 4 12 Section 4 Rev G 26 If INPUT TYPE RANGE selected was SWITCH CONTACT press the to advance to the next param eter OPEN 1 DESCR IVx OPEN 1 DESCR OPEN Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for 02 instructi
210. not appear Passwords can restrict access to the Display Chart and System prompts and the Enables and Passwords prompts section If any of the passwords is set to a value other than zero the corresponding password will be requested when the operator attempts to access that prompt section Should a password be forgotten or mis placed contact the factory for the master password From the Normal Display press the until ENABLES amp PASSWORDS appears in the lower display line If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to Enables amp Passwords is allowed 1 Press the to display CHANGE ALL ENABLES CHANGE ALL ENABLES NO Press the 2a change then to NO YES desired choice then press the ENTER Choose YES to change all Enables at the same time If selection was NO proceed to step 2 If selection was YES CHANGE ALL TO TOGGLE Press the a change mi le desired choice then press Section 9 9 1 Edition 3 Rev G Selections DISABLED ENABLED TOGGLE 2 Press the to advance to the next parameter ACTION TIME SETTINGS ACTION TIME SETTINGS Press the a change then 10 DISABLED ENABLED desired choice then press the ENTER 3 Press the 8 advance to the next parameter PROFILE ENTRY Only on Profiles PROFILE ENTRY Only on Profilers m DISABLED ENABLED Press the to change then 10 desired choice then press the
211. nsions CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE Section 1 Any of over 20 values can be used to drive analog outputs e g inputs derived variables etc 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA nominal 12 bits based on a0 to 25 6mA span 0 1 of 20mA span reference accuracy 650 ohm load Four are included in the option Nine displayable with and without commas Continuous preload count down and pulse counting One per totalizer Fully configurable Twelve Add subtract multiply divide average exponential log 10 log e power 10 power e Linear polynomial C to F F to C linear mass flow DP mass flow BTU RH Fo ZrO High select low select high peak low peak track and hold 1 of 2 selector convert actuator Four 21 point curves usable in multiple calculations Typically accurate to better than 1 Clamps calculated value 10 and 110 Over 100 digital values are accessible Twenty four combinations of 24 items NOT OR AND parentheses Four Six Universal power supply 85 min to 265 max VAC 50 60Hz 60 VA maximum Gasketed cover case and windows Structural foam case and cover with plastic or glass window areas Door lock available NEMA 3 standard NEMA 4X optional Four openings standard 2 additional as required Panel wall or optional pipe mounting 14 12 inches wide x 16 77 inches high x 7 75 inches deep 358 65mm wide x 425 96mm high x 196 85mm deep Edition 3 Rev G CONSTRUCTION cont Panel Cutout Panel Dep
212. ntaining parameters which configure Chart Messages A Chart Message consists of a text message four values and a time and date stamp The message is recorded on the chart when triggered by the transition of an actuator The text is recorded unless it is blank and the values and time date stamp are optional So the message could be one to six lines Missing lines cause the remaining lines to be moved up The mes sage overwrites the scale data as opposed to being ored with it in order to insure readability Trend and time lines are not overwritten or lost Chart Prompts Page 6 1 One of three main prompt sections used to provide access to all chart related configuration functions and provide access to change the chart when required Edition 3 C 2 Appendix C Rev G CHART ROTATION Actuator Actuator that is controlled by the selected state for the CHART ROTATION prompt found in the Chart Prompts section See ROTATE CHART ACTUATR CHART ROTATION Prompt Chart Prompts Page 6 2 Parameter that controls the CHART ROTATION actuator This parameter is like a special Operator Input which is pre configured but located in the Chart Prompts as it causes no action directly but merely changes the state of the CHART ROTATION actuator For some applications it may be desirable to control chart rotation with a prompt so this was included in the Chart Prompts CHART SIZE Chart Prompts Chart Configuration Page 6 2 Parameter that specifies th
213. nts that can be configured in the SETPOINTS section of CONFIGURATION This menu sets the text prompt for the setpoint the unit type decimal position limits and the display option mode Setting and or changing the setpoints is accomplished via the gt section If the PROMPT TEXT description for the setpoint is blank the setpoint IS NOT ACTIVE and WILL NOT BE DISPLAYED in the prompt section From the Normal Display press the key until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line If PASS WORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to CON FIGURATION is allowed If CONFIGURATION is not displayed then Configuration has been disabled Refer to Section9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Configuration With CONFIGURATION in the lower display line press the key then the key until SETPOINTS appears in the lower display line 1 Press the key to display SETPOINT NUMBER SETPOINT NUMBER Press the a change then to desired setpoint number then press the Edition 3 13 18 Section 13 Rev G 2 Press the to advance to the next parameter PROMPT TEXT SPx PROMPT TEXT SETPOINT 1 Selections TEXT Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text for instructions Note If PROMPT TEXT is blank the corresponding setpoint will not be activated or appear in the prompts associ ated with the ors key Also no other prompts are displayed
214. o desired value then press ENTER Selections 1 to 9999 seconds 26 Press the OR advance to the next parameter ALARM 4 HYSTERESIS Ax4 HYSTERESIS Note Units correspond to Units configured in Process Variables 3 units Selections 999999 Press M change then to decimal position 0 9 9999 decimal position 4 desired value then press lil NOTE If RATE Alarm is selected Hysteresis equals units TIME BASE Section 4 4 43 Edition 3 Rev P R S S V A R A B L 27 Press the to advance to the next parameter LOOP ALARM TIME only seen if CONTROL LOOP OPEN selected as ALARM TYPE and ON OFF selected as CONTROL TYPE PVx LOOP ALARM TIME 60 SECONDS Press the a change then gae desired number then press the Selections 1 9999 28 Press the 8 advance the next parameter ALARM INHIBIT only seen if an Alarm has been configured P R S S V R L 3 S PVx LOOP ALARM INHIBIT NO Press the a change then to desired choices then press the On power up alarm condition may occur based on the alarm value the process variable value if appropriate to the alarm type the active setpoint value This would normally activate the alarm however if the pertinent alarm is inhibited the alarm indication is suppressed and the alarm will remain inactive
215. omatically proceeds to the next parameter entry If PASSWORDS are not zero and the value is set to the incorrect password the message INVALID PASSWORD will appear in the upper display 3 4 6 ENABLES If Chart Prompts is DISABLED when the CHART key is pressed the message CHART KEY DISABLED will appear in the lower display If Display Prompts is DISABLED when the DISP key is pressed DISPLAY KEY DISABLED will appear in the lower display If other parameters are DISABLED their corresponding prompts will not be displayed 3 5 THE DISPLAY During normal operation the display shows data according to the setup determined by the settings in Display and Configuration prompts The display has 2 lines of 20 characters with 8 status indicators The display may be configured as continuous or sequential as well as 1 value at a time 2 values at a time or 4 PVs ata time Refer to Section 3 7 for details 3 6 GENERAL After completing installation and wiring of the instrument the configuration procedures must be performed to prepare the instrument for operation on the intended application The procedures include selecting specific prompts parameters entering data and possible jumper positioning Once properly configured the instrument will retain the selections in memory Not all selections are applicable for every recorder Note Before configuring it is recommended that the Software Reference Record Sheets found at the end of this
216. onfigured setpoint units text Edition 3 5 2 Section 5 Rev G To change the setpoint press the key then keys to desired setpoint then press the key To exit press the Be 5 Following the top level Setpoint Prompt if any controllers are configured for PID control and are in manual mode the following prompt will appear SELECT MANUAL VALUES This prompt provides an alternative method of manually changing controller outputs When this prompt is dis played pressing the key will display the following Cx OUTPUT 1 visible if output 1 proportional MANUAL OUTPUT nnn96 value 0 100 initially current value Cx OUTPUT 2 visible if output 2 proportional MANUAL OUTPUT nnn96 value 0 100 initially current value These prompts are displayed for each controller in manual mode where x is the controller number 1 4 To change press the key then keys to desired setting then press the key To exit press the key Section 5 5 3 Edition 3 Rev G 6 Following the top level Manual Values prompts the Standard Display prompts are displayed as follows DISPLAY MODE CONTINUOUS SEQUENCE AMM used default CONTINUOUS DISPLAY FORMAT 1 VAL 2 VALS 4 VALS AMM used default 1 VAL SEQUENTIAL DISPLAY DURATION n SECONDS SEQUENCE AMM used default 1 7 If any OPERATOR INPUTS Ols are configured and visible they appear in numerical order following the above prompts The prompts are as follows PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP programmable promp
217. ons Selections Text 27 If INPUT TYPE RANGE selected was SWITCH CONTACT press the to advance to the next param eter CLOSED 0 DESCR IVx CLOSED 0 DESCR CLOSED Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for Selections Text instructions Section 4 4 13 Edition 3 Rev G N P U T S amp S T A N T S 28 Press ne to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY FILTER IVx DISPLAY FILTER 0 SECONDS Selections Press ine n change then gae 0 to 9999 seconds then 6 desired value then press the e 29 Press NI and the display advances to the next input to be programmed Refer to the beginning of this section page 4 1 4 1 2 CONSTANTS Constants are available only when MATH has been specified and present in the model number order matrix From the Normal Display press the until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line If PASS WORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to Configu ration is allowed If CONFIGURATION is not displayed then Configuration has been disabled Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Configuration With CONFIGURATION in the display press the then until CONSTANTS appears in the lower display line 1 Press the to display CONSTANT NUMBER CONSTANT NUMBER Press the to change then ga desired number then press the Edition 3 4 14
218. or a 24 hour rotation assuming all backlash removed Two line 40 character vacuum fluorescent display with 21 inch 5 mm high characters Eight user configurable red LED status indicators Fifteen keys for programming and unit operation Three refer to manual Automatic or manual sequencing Twelve Twelve Up to four alarms for each of four process variables Process high or low rate rising or falling Fully adjustable Any of over 100 digital values states can be used to actuate on off outputs e g alarms time dates timers etc Relays SPDT contacts rated 5 amps resistive at 115 VAC 2 5 amps resistive at 230 VAC 1 8 HP at 230 VAC single phase 250 VA at 115 230 VAC Solid State Relay Driver Open collector output can provide 40mA at 3 VDC or 20mA at 4VDC Short circuit current is limited to 100 mA Pulsed Outputs Edition 3 Rev 50ms pulse when used with totalizer pulsed outputs 1 10 Section 1 CURRENT OUTPUTS Drivers Output Span Resolution Accuracy Compliance TOTALIZERS Number Digits Types Presets Pulsed Outputs COMPUTING CAPABILITIES Derived Variables Math functions Built In Equations Other Functions Custom Curves RH Calculation LOGIC CAPABILITIES Actuators Derived Actuators Logic Operators Timers Time Date Combination Actuators POWER REQUIREMENTS Line Voltage Power Consumption CONSTRUCTION Enclosure NEMA Rating Conduit Openings Mounting Overall Dime
219. or simplicity of operation etc upon selection of a new choice the unit will automatically go into the modify mode unless its a special case as noted below In this prompt section use the CHART key to advance to the next prompt without modifying the current param eter IMPORTANT The CHANGE CHART procedure shown below must be followed If it is not important information chart tags time scales etc may not be printed 6 1 CHANGE CHART 1 Press the z CHANGE CHART appears in the upper display line and NO YES NO blinking appears in the lower display line If the chart has previously been stopped for changing this prompt may not appear 2 Select YES by pressing the key directly below the displayed YES or by pressing lt or until YES is blinking then press the em 3 START NEW CHART appears in the top display and NO YES NO blinking appears in the bottom display 4 Change the chart at this time 5 Select YES by pressing the key directly below the displayed YES or by pressing Ee or until YES is blinking then press the e Continued on next page Section 6 6 1 Edition 3 Rev 6 Upon selection of YES the chart is initialized and the unit exits to the NORMAL DISPLAY if Chart Rotation and Trend Data Collect are ON If either Chart Rotation or Trend Data Collect are OFF after the initialization message the unit will display CHART ROTATION OFF and or TREND DATA COLLECT OFF as applicable until any key is pressed Th
220. p 13 or 14 100 units Press the ag change then ga Selections 999999 desired value rd 8 og 0 decimal position 4 then press Section 4 4 9 Edition 3 Rev G 19 If V mA conversion selected was EXP press the to advance to the next parameter EXPONENT IVx EXPONENT 1 500 Press change then to desired value then press the 20 Press the to advance to the next parameter CUTOFF TYPE IVx VALUE CUTOFF TYPE NONE 02 Selections 0 000 to 5 000 Press no idle change then a Selections NONE AT VALUE TO ZERO BELOW VALUE to desired choice then press the TO ZERO NEAR ZERO 21 If CUTOFF TYPE selected was other than NONE press the to advance to the next parameter CUTOFF VALUE IVx CUTOFF VALUE Units correspond to units configured in step 0 units 14 or 15 Press change then a to desired value then press the 999999 decimal position 0 9 9999 decimal position 4 ENTER Edition 3 4 10 Section 4 Rev G 22 Press the to advance to the next parameter INPUT CORRECT 1 not seen if SWITCH CONTACT or COM was selected IVx INPUT CORRECT 1 0 AT Selections Selections 999999 999999 decimal position 0 decimal position 0 9 9999 9 9999 decimal position 4 decimal position 4 02 a iras to select digit to change then ga desired digit then press the This will cha
221. p Outputs Performs calibration of current outputs Solenoid Adjustment Allows calibration of the current through the solenoid driver and is adjusted at the factory to maximize life of the solenoid actuators This procedure would not normally need to be performed in the field Calibration Defaults Invokes the calibration default values Section 11 11 1 Edition 3 Rev 11 1 INPUT CALIBRATION This routine allows for the calibration of all input channels and all input types Important Notes 1 The calibration information is stored on each input board for all input types in an Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EEPROM The instrument and every input board supplied to the field is shipped from the factory calibrated for each input type 2 Recalibration should only be performed if it is determined that the Recorder is outside of the operating specifications for the instrument itself without considering the input source Input Correction should be used to correct for Input Signal inaccuracies 3 If recalibration is necessary it is only required for the particular input type and range that is being used With INPUT CALIBRATION in the lower display line press the to enter the Input Calibration The upper display line will display CALIBRATE INPUT and the lower display line will display IV1 If an input other than input 1 is to be calibrated use the MOD LEFT SCROLL UP or DOWN as required to select the proper input nu
222. parameter DISPLAY UNITS SVx DISPLAY UNITS F Selections F OTHER C 5 If DISPLAY UNITS selected was OTHER press the to advance to the next parameter OTHER UNITS SVx OTHER UNITS Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for S U L A T V A R L S instructions Selections Text 6 Press the to advance to the next parameter DECIMAL POSITION SVx DECIMAL POSITION 0 Selections Press the a change then to desired value then press the Units correspond to Units configured in Simulated Variable Section 4 4 101 Edition 3 Rev G 7 Press the to advance to the next parameter RANGE LOW SVx RANGE LOW 0 units Selections Press the a change then to 0 9 9999 desired value then press the decimal position 4 8 Press the to advance to the next parameter RANGE HIGH SVx RANGE HIGH Units correspond to 100 units Units configured in Simulated Variable S U L A T 3 V A R L S Selections Press the a change then to posi 0 9 9999 desired value then press the m decimal position 4 Edition 3 4 102 Section 4 Rev G 9 Press the to advance to the next parameter PERIOD SVx PERIOD 1 FREQ 60 MINUTES Selections 1 to 1440 10 Press the to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY OPTION SVx DISPLAY OPTION IN BOTH MODES Selections N
223. pically used for testing purposes From the Normal Dispplay press the until CONFIGURATION is seen in the upper display line If PASS WORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to Configu ration is allowed If CONFIGURATION is not displayed then Configuration has been disabled Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Configuration With CONFIGURATION is the display press the then the until SIMULATED VARIABLES appears in the lower display line Section 4 4 99 Edition 3 Rev G R T M S S A G S amp S U L A V A R L S 1 Press the to display SV NUMBER SV NUMBER Press the change then to desired number then press the EM ENTER Selections 1104 2 Press the to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY TAG SVx DISPLAY TAG SIM VAL X Selections Text 3 Press the to advance to the next parameter TYPE Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for instructions S U L A T R L S SVx TYPE OFF Press the to change then to desired choice then K press the SIN WAVE SAWTOOTH SQUARE WAVE SPIKES Edition 3 4 100 Section 4 Rev G If OFF was selected no other prompts for SIMULATED VARIABLES will be seen Refer back to step 1 page 4 97 4 Press the to advance to the next
224. played only if their actuator is active and appear during Normal Display as specified by the DISPLAY MODE parameter They can provide a variety of functions from preemptive critical alarm messages to continuous display of reference information such as what each LED represents Out of range See Sensor break PEN COLOR System Prompts Configuration Recorders Page 4 45 Parameter used to specify the pen or color to be used POWER UP STATE System Prompts Configuration Operator Inputs Page 4 84 Parameter that specifies what the state of the actuator should be if power to the instrument is removed and reapplied The choices are OFF ON and SAME For most applications SAME would be the choice so the actuator doesn t change over a power interruption PREEMPT System Prompts Configuration Operator Messages Page 4 88 One of the choices for DISPLAY MODE which specifies that the message continuously overrides the display of values PREEMPT TO CYCLIC System Prompts Configuration Operator Messages Page 4 88 One of the choices for DISPLAY MODE which specifies that the message overrides the display of values until any key is pressed after which the message will appear cyclically PREEMPT TO OFF System Prompts Configuration Operator Messages Page 4 88 One of the choices for DISPLAY MODE which specifies that the message overrides the display of values until any key is pressed after which it will not appear until
225. position for the next time line after the completion of printing for each recording pen Upon completion of PRINT RANGE LIST or PRINT SCALES if configured the instrument is ready to begin trending Trending will not begin if the instrument status has been set to OFF or the chart has been stopped When the instrument first begins trending after a new chart has been installed it will print as needed per the chart format time lines scale lines scale values units and recorder tag for each recording pen until it reaches the position corresponding to the current time If the instrument status has not been set to off and the chart has not been stopped by other than the chart being full historical trend data will also be included The time date and chart tag will be printed during this process At this point the instrument will begin the normal recording process and marks the chart on the outer ring with an arrow M to indicate where the trend began 3 8 3 EXAMPLE CHART Figure 3 2 page 3 12 illustrates the typical data presentation for a 12 chart The recorder trends are referred to by number in this illustration for black and white reproduction Refer to Table 3 1 page 3 10 and Table 3 2 page 3 11 for the corresponding recorder configuration program ming data For this example the instrument has four inputs as follows Raw Flow Value Temperature Pressure pH The value recorded 1 is a derived value
226. prompt so this was included in the Chart Prompts Trend data collection A general term which refers to the instruments ability to collect trend data to be recorded when the chart is rotating for normal recording which excludes initializing a new chart If data collection remains on while the chart is not rotating or is being initialized when rotation resumes collected data will be recorded prior to recording current real time data The instrument can collect up to 360 trend values If an instrument is configured with 4 Recorders and a 24 hour chart speed it could collect data for 36 minutes before it began to loose the oldest data 360 values 4 Recorders 90 print cycles times 24 seconds per print cycle print interval results in 2160 seconds or 36 minutes Value A general term referring to a number or a parameter that is a number VALUE FILTER System Prompts Configuration Parameter found in various sections that specifies the filtering to be applied to the value for all purposes This filter affects the IV PV DV etc as it is used for alarming recording or any other purpose Zero specifies no filtering A value of 1 to 9999 specifies the number of seconds over which values will be accumulated prior to calculating a new average for display See DISPLAY FILTER V MA CONV System Prompts Configuration Inputs Page 4 7 Parameter that specifies the type of conversion for the input The choices are LINEAR SQRT and EXP for
227. r MANUAL control proceed as follows From the Normal Display depress the key CONTROLLER 1 should be displayed on the upper display line or what was configured for CA1 LINE 1 TEXT above and A M should be displayed on the lower display line or what was configured for CA1 LINE 2 TEXT above Depress the key directly below A M and the lower display line should display AUTOMATIC MANUAL with the active selection blinking To select Manual depress the key directly below the MANUAL in the display 13 1 ENTERING CONTROLLERS From the Normal Display press the key until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line If PASS WORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to CON FIGURATION is allowed If CONFIGURATION is not displayed then Configuration has been disabled Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Configuration Note A Controller although configured will not operate unless the corresponding PROCESS VARIABLE PV is properly configured With CONFIGURATION in the lower display line press the key then the key until CONTROLLERS appears in the lower display line 1 Press the key to display CONTROLLER NUMBER CONTROLLER NUMBER Press B change then ie desired controller number then press the to store into menory Selections 1 8 Section 13 13 3 Edition 3 Rev G 2 Press the to advance to the next parameter C
228. ramming of many parameters Copy functions make configuring similar sets of parameters even faster Two methods of modifying character strings simplifies the entry of English tags and units The instrument even displays the proper jumper placement for the installer The instrument can virtually be configured without looking at the manual Edition 3 1 4 Section 1 RevG OPERATOR INTERFACE Beyond the configuration capability the display keypad and prompting system provide superior real time data presentation The display of each instrument value is configurable and three display formats are available providing a range from fully detailed displays with 20 character tags alarm indications values and units to four process values displayed simultaneously Separate keys are used to access the display chart and configuration related areas By selective enabling and password protection access to various operational areas of the instrument can be limited or controlled Some keys can also be config ured to provide special functions such as resetting totalizers The operator interface has been designed to make daily operation as simple as possible Changing charts for example requires only three keystrokes CONSTRUCTION The instrument is housed in a structural foam moulded enclosure which can be panel or surface mounted Mounting brackets are included Its design allows it to fit into the smallest panel cutout of competitive products while it cove
229. ration is allowed If CALIBRATION is not displayed then Calibration has been disabled Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Calibration Press the to display CALIBRATION in the upper display and SOLENOID ADJUSTMENT in the lower display line Press the to advance the lower display to other calibrations available The table below Table 11 1 lists the calibration routines All instruments are calibrated prior to shipment from the factory CAUTION Do not attempt any calibration without the proper test equipment that meets or exceeds the specifications listed below RTD Inputs Decade box with 0 01 resolution or equivalent OR 100 ohm 0 01 AND 277 ohm 0 01 CURRENT Inputs 0 00 mA to 20 00 mA Source 0 01 mA DC TC or 0 25 mV Inputs 0 00 mV to 25 00 mV Source 0 01 mV DC TC or 0 100 mV Inputs 0 00 mV to 100 00 mV Source 0 01 mV DC 0 to 1 VOLT Inputs 0 00 V to 1 00 V 0 01 V DC 0 to 10 VOLT Inputs 0 00 V to 10 00 V 0 01 V DC For TC only one 1 mercury thermometer 25 deg C or equivalent and a Type X thermocouple X type of TC input being calibrated TABLE 11 1 CALIBRATION ROUTINES Input Calibration Performs calibration of all input sources Parameter Defaults Invokes the default values for all program parameters Chart Calibration Performs calibration of the pen to the chart It is recommended that chart calibration be performed whenever the chart size is changed Milliam
230. re 2 or 2 F Linear Ranges 10 least significant display units For a single output controller the saturation condition is simply 0 and OUT 1 MAX For dual output control lers the saturation condition considers the combination of the two output types reverse or direct and responds accordingly NOTES Correct operation of the Loop Alarm depends upon reasonably accurate PID tunings and the Loop Alarm is automatically disabled during manual control Upon exit from manual control the Loop Alarm is auto matically re enabled if selected Section 4 4 37 Edition 3 Rev G 12 Press the advance to the next parameter ALARM 1 TIME BASE only seen if 1 TYPE is RATE Ax1 TIME BASE PER SEC Press 9 change then to desired choice then press ENTER 13 Press the advance to the next parameter ALARM 1 SAMPLE PERIOD only seen if Ax1 TYPE is Selections PERSEC PER MIN PERHOUR PER DAY RATE Ax1 SAMPLE PERIOD 10 SECONDS Press 9 change then to 1 to 9999 seconds desired value then press ENTER P R S S V A R L 14 Press the advance to the next parameter ALARM 1 HYSTERESIS Ax1 HYSTERESIS Note Units correspond to Units configured in Process Variables 3 units Selections 0 r1 999999 Press 9 change then to decimal position 0 9 9999 Y desired value then press the 2 decimal position 4 NOTE If
231. red number then press the decimal position 0 9 9999 decimal position 4 o JI m O JI O O mI Units correspond to Units configured in corresponding Value to Record parameter previously selected 16 Press the O advance to the next parameter SCALE 2 INTERVAL Only if Zone 2 HIGH 0 Rx SCALE 2 INTERVAL 10 DIVISIONS Press the a change then then to Selections 0 to 200 desired number then press the 0 NO SCALES Edition 3 4 52 Section 4 Rev G 17 Press the advance to the next parameter POSITION ON ERROR pen location in Chart Divisions on an ERROR condition Rx POSITION ON ERROR DIVISION 100 Press the a change then then to d 0 to 200 desired number then press the 18 MI advance to the next parameter FILTER Rx FILTER 0 SECONDS Press the a change then to desired value then press ENTER Selections 0 to 9999 19 Press the and the display advances to the next recorder variable to be programmed Refer to the beginning of this section page 4 43 Section 4 4 53 Edition 3 Rev G o JI m O JI O O mI 4 1 7 TOTALIZERS Totalizers are seen only if TOTALIZATION was specified and present in the model number order matrix From the Normal Display press the until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line If PASS WORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to Configu ratio
232. relative to the CHART DIVISIONS parameter Divisions means the same as rings Division 0 is the inner ring DRAG MIN TO MAX System Prompts Configuration Recorders Page 4 46 The recording method that prints a line between the minimum and maximum values of the trended value during the print interval DV FUNCTION System Prompts Configuration Derived Variables Page 4 19 Parameter used to select type of math function to perform derived variable calculations DV INPUT ACTUATOR System Prompts Configuration Derived Variables Page 4 23 Parameter that selects an actuator used as an input to a Derived Variable Function that determines what the output from that function will be DV RESET ACTUATOR System Prompts Configuration Derived Variables Page 4 24 Parameter that selects an actuator used as an input to a Derived Variable Function that causes the respective reset action which may vary with each DV function ENABLED System Prompts Enables amp Passwords Section 9 Choice which causes the corresponding prompt section to be accessible by the operator ENABLES amp PASSWORDS System Prompts Section 9 Prompt section where prompt sections are enabled or disabled and passwords are configured HYSTERESIS System Prompts Configuration Process Variables Page 4 37 Parameter used to specify the deadband for an alarm Deadbands are one sided below the setpoint INPUT System Prompts Configuration Page
233. rent input Terminal block 1 TB1 is Input 1 3 5 and 7 and terminal block 2 TB2 is Input 2 4 6 and 8 Installation of an appropriate shunt resistor is NOT REQUIRED Positioning JU15 16 properly connects the appropriate shunt resistor that is populated on the Input Board NOTE INPUT CONDITIONING JUMPERS MUST BE POSITIONED AS SHOWN FOR CURRENT INPUT IN EITHER FIGURE 2 8 OR 2 8A DEPENDING ON WHICH CIRCUIT BOARD IS FITTED ALSO NOTE THERE IS NO SENSOR BREAK DETECTION FOR ZERO BASED CURRENT INPUTS EXAMPLE 0 20MA FIGURE 2 10 FIGURE 2 10A JU15 JU16 ci 88 p Ae JU7 JU6 JU11 JU2 JU5 JU12 NOTE Terminal Block 1 Terminal 1 is on the RIGHT Terminal Block 2 Terminal 1 is on the LEFT Edition 3 2 12 Section 2 Rev G 2 3 8 SWITCH INPUT CONNECTIONS Note Up to four Input Boards may be present stacked 4 high Input Board 1 is the bottom board Two versions of Input Board s may be found see Figure 2 10 and Figure 2 10A Input Board 1 is used for Input 1 and if equipped Input 2 Input Board 2 is used for Input 3 and Input 4 if equipped Input Board 3 is for Input 5 and Input 6 Input Board 4 is for Input 7 and Input 8 Connect one leg to terminal 1 and connect the other leg to terminal 2 on the Input Board s to be switch input Terminal block 1 TB1 is Input 1 3 5 and 7 and terminal block 2 TB2 is Input 2 4 6 and 8 NOTE INPUT CONDITIONING JUMPERS MUST BE POSITIONED AS SHOWN FOR SWITCH INPUT IN EITHE
234. rms listed are actually the prompt shown on the first line the definition refers to the corre sponding parameter value choice or text Some prompts appear multiple times in a section or in multiple sec tions with each occurrence having a separate value associated with it ACTION ON NEW CHART Chart Configuration Page 6 11 Specifies the action the recorder takes when a new chart is installed NONE JUST CONTINUE trending PRINT a RANGE LIST first or PRINT a set of SCALES for each pen first ACTION TIME SETTINGS System Prompts Section 8 Prompt section where values are entered in Time and Date parameters which are used to generate the following actuators TIME 1 TIME DATE 1 TIME 2 TIME DATE 2 TIME1 TO TIME 2 and TIME DATE 1 TO 2 The TIME1 and TIME 2 actuators are true when the time is equal to or greater than the time values during each 24 hour day and false between midnight and the time specified The TIME DATE 1 and TIME DATE 2 actuators are true when the time and date are equal to or greater than the time and date values specified and remain true into the future TIME 1 TO TIME 2 is true when the time is equal to or greater than the TIME 1 parameter and less than or equal to TIME 2 parameter during the next 24 hour period Examples If TIME 1 is set to 8 AM and TIME 2 is set to 4 PM then TIME 1 TO TIME 2 is true for 8 hours during the day If TIME 1 is set to 10 PM and TIME 2 is set to 6 AM then TIME 1 TO TIME 2 is true for 8 ho
235. rofile Status Action If a profile has been aborted the profile can be continued using the choice CONTINUE 12 Press the SCROLL key and the display returns back to START PROFILE 14 8 Section 14 PROFILE NUMBER Parameter DESCRIPTION SETPOINTS TO PROFILE NUMBER OF SEGMENTS SEGMENT 1 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 2 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 3 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 4 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 5 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL Section 14 14 9 Edition 3 RevG PROFILE NUMBER SEGMENT 6 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 7 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPOINT 4 EVENT OUTPUTS RAMP DWELL TIME hhh mm ss EVENT OUTPUTS DWELL SEGMENT 8 RAMP TIME hhh mm ss SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 3 SETPO
236. rs the largest cutout of others Glass and plastic windows are available along with a cover lock The standard enclosure carries a rating with an optional NEMA4X available OPTIONS The instrument is available with a full compliment of options Up to eight isolated universal inputs are available with each being configurable to any of the available input types Up to four isolated transmitter power supplies can be added Up to four inputs or derived variables can be assigned as process variables allowing up to four alarms for each Alarms can be process high or low or rate rising or falling The alarming capability is standard but the hardware outputs are optional Up to eight on off outputs are available either relay or solid state relay driver outputs Besides alarms any of over eighty other digital values states can be used to actuate on off outputs Up to two non isolated analog outputs or up to 4 isolated analog outputs are available Any of over twenty values can be used to drive analog outputs i e inputs derived variables etc Other options include PC based configuration software and a communications interface FIELD UPGRADES All of items listed in the Options section are easily installed in the field Typically it involves just adding boards but possibly PROMs may need to be changed as well To add totalizers or the math package only PROMS must be changed If the four color option was purchased only PROMS need to be chan
237. rue causes the specified Operator Message 1 through 12 to be displayed per the Operator Message Display Mode setting OMxx DISPLAY MODE System Prompts Configuration Operator Messages Page 4 88 Parameter that specifies the method of displaying the operator message when it is actuated The choices are PREEMPT PREEMPT TO CYCLIC PREEMPT TO OFF CYCLIC and BACKGROUND ON STATE TEXT System Prompts Configuration Operator Inputs Page 4 83 Parameter that specifies the text that will be displayed at the right of the lower display when the Operator Input is shown in the Display Prompts When this choice is selected the corresponding actuator OP INP 1 through OP INP 12 will be set to true Typical text may be ON YES RUN etc ON CONTINUOUS One of the list of actuators which is effectively no selection but this choice evaluates to true active or 1 This is the default or initial configuration for a few actuator parameters such as INSTR ON ACTUATOR and ALARMS ONACTUATOR Edition 3 C 8 Appendix C Rev G OPERATOR INPUTS System Prompts Configuration Page 4 84 Prompts section that configures the text for the message and states and actuation type associated with each Operator Input The corresponding actuators can then be changed in the Display Prompts OPERATOR MESSAGES System Prompts Configuration Page 4 88 Prompts section that configures the two lines of text and DISPLAY MODE for each Operator Message They are dis
238. s Configuration Operator Inputs Page 4 83 Achoice for the parameter ACTUATION STYLE which specifies that the actuator associated with an Operator Input will remain in the selected state continuously rather than momentarily See MOMENTARY CONTINUOUS DISPLAY MODE Display Prompts Page 5 1 Achoice for the parameter DISPLAY MODE which specifies that the instrument will continuously display a single step of the Display Sequence and will not automatically advance The UP or DOWN keys can be used to step backward or forward through the list or series of displays CONTINUOUS TOTAL System Prompts Configuration Totalizers Page 4 56 Achoice for the parameter TOTALIZER TYPE which specifies that the total counts to 999 999 999 and then rolls over The corresponding actuator TOTAL 1 through TOTAL 4 is true whenever the total is equal to or greater than the TOTALIZER PRESET value The RESET ACTUATOR resets the total to zero COUNT DOWN PRESET System Prompts Configuration Totalizers Page 4 56 Achoice for the parameter TOTALIZER TYPE which specifies that the total counts down to zero from a preset value The corresponding actuator TOTAL 1 through TOTAL 4 is true whenever the total is equal to zero The RESET ACTUATOR resets the total to the TOTALIZER PRESET value COUNT TO PRESET System Prompts Configuration Totalizers Page 4 56 Achoice for the parameter TOTALIZER TYPE which specifies that the total counts to or just abo
239. s and provide values for the out of range testing The RANGE LIMIT HIGH LOW value corresponds to the engineer ing unit value when the analog input is at the respective INPUT RANGE HIGH LOW value If the resultant IV Input Value is 5 above the high value or below the low value the unit will drive the corresponding IV to 99999 or 99999 depending upon whether UPSCALE or DOWNSCALE was selected for SENSOR BREAK The input value will also be flagged as being in error If the 5 allowed is insufficient for a particular application the band can be widened by widening the INPUT RANGE and RANGE LIMIT values RANGE LIMIT HIGH LOW are not needed for the conversion of TC and RTD input types but are included for the out of range testing When the INPUT TYPE is changed to TC or RTD or when the TC TYPE or RTD TYPE is changed the high and low values Will be set to the limits of the respective input after which they may be modified Rate alarm hysteresis System Prompts Configuration Process Variables Page 4 37 When the ALARM TYPE selected is RATE RAISING or FALLING hysteresis applies to the rate of change For example for an alarm setpoint of 10 degrees C MIN HYSTERESIS of 1 degree C MIN the unit will alarm at 10 degrees C MIN and reset the alarm at 9 degrees C MIN RATE RISING and alarm at 10 degrees C MIN and reset the alarm at 11 degrees C MIN RATE FALLING RECORDER In this instrument RECORDER applies to an entity that pro
240. s that do not have surge suppressors supplied RC resistance capacitance networks and or MOV metal oxide varistors may be added Inductive Coils MOV s are recommended for transient suppression in inductive coils connected in parallel and as close as possible to the coil See Figure 2 2 below Additional protection may be provided by adding an RC network across the MOV Contacts Arcing may occur across contacts when the contact opens and closes This results in electrical noise as well as damage to the contacts Connecting a RC network properly sized can eliminate this arc For circuits up to 3 amps a combination of a 47 ohm resistor and a 0 1 microfarad capacitor 1000 volts is recommended For circuits from 3 to 5 amps connect 2 of these in parallel See Figure 2 3 below FIGURE 2 2 l 0 5 T mfd 1000V Inductive Load 220 ohms 115V 1 4W 280V 1W FIGURE 2 3 Inductive Load Edition 3 2 4 Section 2 Rev Sensor Placement Thermocouple or RTD Thermocouple lead resistance should not exceed 300 ohms If this is exceeded instrument accuracy could be affected Two wire RTD s should be used only with lead lengths less than 10 feet If the temperature probe is to be subjected to corrosive or abrasive conditions it should be protected by the appropriate thermowell The probe should be positioned to reflect true process temperature In liquid media the most agitated area In air the
241. s the DOWN ARROW key to display INPUT NUMBER The INPUT NUM BER must agree with the input to be displayed and recorded Press the MOD key use the UP DOWN arrows to change the value and the ENTER key to make the selection Step 2 Depress the SCROLL key twice to skip over IVx COPY INITIALIZE The display should show IVx DISPLAY TAG If you wish to enter a Display Tag use the MOD key and then the UP DOWN arrows or MOD key again to enter the Character Selection then select characters for the Tag Step 3 Depress the SCROLL key to advance to the display IVx INPUT TYPE RANGE The default will be OFF NO INPUT Select MOD to change this and SCROLL to select an input type Press ENTER to finalize the selection Step 4 The Prompts displayed after the next depression of the SCROLL key will depend on which Input Type Range was selected If Thermocouple or RTD were selected then the specific type of Thermocouple or RTD will need to be selected Use the MOD key to change then the SCROLL and ENTER keys as before Degrees C or F can also be selected after the type of TC or RTD has been specified by pressing the LEFT ARROW or SCROLL key to choice then press Enter If mA mV or volt was selected go to step 5 otherwise go to Step 7 Step 5 Press the SCROLL key to INPUT RANGE LOW default 0 and INPUT RANGE HIGH default 100 These two parameters specify the desired analog signal range 4 20mA 0 100mV that will be scaled to engineering units St
242. s the to change then to desired value then press the ENTER When CONTROL LOOP OPEN is selected for ALARM TYPE and NON PID is selected for CONTROL TYPE CONTROLLERS section of CONFIGURATION prompt LOOP ALARM TYPE will be displayed P R S S V R L E S The CONTROL LOOP ALARM is a special alarm which detects faults in the control feedback loop by continuously monitoring process variable response to the control output s The Loop Alarm facility repeatedly checks the control output s for saturation For PID saturation is either or both outputs being at the maximum or minimum For On Off control saturation is the control output being ON If an output is found to be in saturation a timer is started thereafter if the saturated output has not caused the process variable to be corrected by a pre determined amount V after a time Loop Alarm Time has elapsed the Loop Alarm goes active Subsequently the Loop Alarm facility repeatedly checks the process variable and the control output s When the process variable starts to change the value in the correct sense or when the output comes out of saturation the Loop Alarm is de activated For PID contron the internal Loop Alarm Time is always set to twice the inverse of the reset value Integral Time Constant parameter For ON OFF control the value of the LOOP ALARM TIME parameter is used The value of V is dependant upon the input type Temperatu
243. scribed below pipe to be determined Figure 2 1A and 2 1B below and page 2 shows an installation view and physical dimensions for a panel mounted instrument The panel where the instrument will be mounted must provide rigid support for the approxi mately 25 pound instrument Adjacent instruments may be mounted within a minimum of 2 inches horizontally and 1 inch vertically providing that proper panel support is supplied Panel Mounting Hardware Required not provided with instrument 4 10 flat head bolts with nuts 4 lock washers Panel Mounting 1 Cut panel opening to the dimensions illustrated in Figure 2 1A below 2 Pre drill four 3 16 dia holes for mounting or use the drill template molded into the case after inserting the instrument into the panel 3 Insert the instrument in the panel opening Firmly fasten the instrument to the panel using the nuts bolts and lock washers Surface Mounting Install the mounting brackets ordered separately on the vertical sides of instrument housing Use the brackets to fasten the instrument to the surface Hardware recommended 10 24 SCRs FIGURE 2 1A 0 4 MIN VERT SPACING MIN HORE SPAC ame 3 600 2296 DIA 91 44mm 186 Sem te SS F 14 180 360 17mm 12 700 322 58mm o t t 10 000 0 7 254 00mm 7 17 78 12 700 322 58 Section 2 2 1 Edition 3 Rev G FIGURE 2 1
244. select IVx where X is the input channel being configured Press ENTER to finalize this selection Step 13 Depress the SCROLL key and skip over the displays until the display shows Rx SPAN 1 LOW and enter the low end of the range of units to be recorded In other words what input value in units should represent the low end of chart Input this value using the MOD UP DOWN arrows SCROLL and ENTER as before Step 14 Repeat for Rx SPAN 1 HIGH using the input value in units that should represent the high end of the chart Note the recorder span should normally correspond to an even multiple of one hundred units for example 0 to 200 or 30 to 130 not 0 to 130 so the scales are convenient to read Step 15 Depress the UP ARROW key 3 times to return to the Normal Display Step 16 Depress the CHART key until SELECT and CHART CONFIGURATION appears Press the DOWN ARROW key to show CHART SIZE Select the chart size being used Press the UP ARROW key twice to return to the Normal Display Step 17 Depress the CHART key again until CHANGE CHART appears Select YES Install the chart Be sure to adjust the three retaining clips according to the size chart being used The display should show START NEW CHART Select YES with the LEFT ARROW key and then press ENTER After initializing the chart the recorder should begin recording and displaying values for the Input Signal just configured Section 3 3 15 Edition 3 Rev G Parameter DISPLAY TA
245. selected was CUSTOM CAx F1 ON STATE TEXT MANUAL Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text for instructions Edition 3 13 24 Section 13 RevG 7 Press the to advance to the next parameter F2 KEY USAGE CAx F2 KEY USAGE NOT USED Selections NOT USED C1 AUTO MANUAL Press the mop to change then C2 AUTO MANUAL e AUTO MANUAL 4 AUTO MANUAL i i LOCALREMOTE to desired choice then press the SP1 SP2 CUSTOM 8 Press the to advance to the next parameter F2 LINE 1 TEXT only seen if F2 KEY USAGE selected is other than NOT USED CAx F2 LINE 1 TEXT Selections TEXT Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text for instructions 9 Press the to advance to the next parameter F2 OFF STATE TEXT only seen if KEY USAGE selected was CUSTOM CAx F2 OFF STATE TXT Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text for instructions Section 13 13 25 Edition 3 Rev G 10 Press the to advance to the next parameter F2 ON STATE TEXT only seen if KEY USAGE selected was CUSTOM CAx F2 ON STATE TEXT Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text for instructions 11 Press the to advance to the next parameter F3 KEY USAGE CAx F3 KEY USAGE SP1 SP2 Selections NOT USED C1 AUTO MANUAL Press the B change then D C2 AUTO MANUAL C3 AUTO MANUAL C4 AUTO MANUAL to desired choice then press the LOCAL REMOTE SP1 SP2 CUSTOM 12 Press the to advance to the next parameter F3 LINE 1 TEXT
246. splay Format Appendix C C 9 Edition 3 Rev G Prompt A message that is displayed the upper line while a prompt section name or parameter value choice or text is displayed in the lower line During normal operation the instrument is either displaying a value s a message or a prompt Prompt section A general term for a group of prompts such as Display Prompts Configuration or Inputs PULSE EVERY System Prompts Configuration Totalizers Page 4 60 Parameter used to specify the number of incremental units between each output pulse See PULSED OUTPUT PULSED OUTPUT Relays System Prompts Configuration Relays Page 4 66 One of the choices for RELAY x USAGE which specifies that the relay will be energized momentarily about 60 milliseconds typically used in conjunction with a totalizer pulsed output PULSED OUTPUT Totals System Prompts Configuration Totalizers Page 4 60 Parameter used to specify whether a pulsed output is configured which generates a contact closure each time the total reaches a multiple of the PULSE EVERY value PULSES System Prompts Configuration Totalizers Page 4 54 One total time base making the totalizer a transition counter counting the number of times the value makes a transition from zero RANGE LIMIT HIGH LOW System Prompts Configuration Inputs Page 4 9 Parameters that specify the normal engineering unit conversion range on inputs other than TC and RTD type
247. ss the to advance to the next parameter DECIMAL POSITION PV DECIMAL POSITION 0 P R 0 S S V R A L 3 S Press 9 change then to Selections desired value then press tH 0104 8 Press the to advance to the next parameter VALUE FILTER PVx VALUE FILTER 0 SECONDS Press 9 change then to desired value then press lil Selections 0 to 9999 seconds Section 4 4 35 Edition 3 Rev G 9 Press the to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY OPTION PVx DISPLAY OPTION IN BOTH MODES Selections NOT DISPLAYED Press 9 change then to IN CONTINUOUS MODE IN SEQUENTIAL MODE desired choice then press the IN BOTH MODES 10 Press the to advance to the next parameter DISPLAY FILTER PVx DISPLAY FILTER 0 SECONDS Press change then to desired value then press P R S S V R L Selections 0 to 9999 seconds Edition 3 4 36 Section 4 Rev G 11 Press the to advance to the next parameter ALARM 1 TYPE Note Process Values Ax1 ALARM TYPE must have been defined previously in order for ALARM prompts to OFF appear Selections for recorder only PROCESS HIGH PROCESS LOW RATE RISING RATE FALLING Additional selections for use with controller option BAND WITHIN BAND OUTSIDE DEVIATION ABOVE DEVIATION BELOW CONTROL LOOP OPEN Pres
248. t etc for on off controls are made For illustration purposes all available parameters have been listed The parameters that will appear on the specific instrument will depend upon the parameters previously selected in CONTROLLERS section To enter TUNING PARAMETERS from the Normal Display press the key until TUNING PARAMETERS is seen in the lower display line If PASSWORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to TUNING PARAMETERS is allowed If TUNING PARAMETERS is not displayed then Tuning Parmeters has been disabled Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Tuning Parameters With TUNING PARAMETERS in the lower display line 1 Press the key to display CONTROLLER NUMBER CONTROLLER NUMBER Press the B change then n to desired controller number then press n Selections 1 4 Section 13 13 31 Edition 3 Rev G 2 Press the to advance to the next parameter COPY INITIALIZE Cx COPY INITIALIZE NO Selections Press the to change then or YES or NO to desired selection then press the If selection is NO see Step 3 If selection is YES Cx COPY FROM CONTRLR Press the D 0 to the control number to be 0 INITIALIZE X copied from Input to be copied from DEFAULT 3 Press the to advance to the next parameter SETPOINT RAMP RATE Cx SP RAMP RATE Note Units correspond to Units 0 units HR
249. t is displayed with the AUTOMATIC MANUAL choice if the associated controller is configured for PID control and is in the manual mode pressing the DOWN key will display the prompts below Note The controller may have its manual actuator set to something other than CAxFn and in this case the prompts below may be accessible even if the above section was AUTOMATIC Cx OUTPUT 1 visible if output 1 is proportional MANUAL OUTPUT nnn value 0 100955 initially current value Cx OUTPUT 2 visible if output 2 is proportional MANUAL OUTPUT nnn value 0 100955 initially current value These prompts allow the controller outputs to be manually changed To change press the a then the key as required to desired output 96 then press the key To exit press the n y 4 Following the top level CONTROL STATE ACCESS prompts if setpoint changes are enabled via ENABLES amp PASSWORDS and at least one setpoint has its PROMPT TEXT configured the following prompt will appear SELECT SETPOINTS This prompt allows setpoint values to be changed When displayed pressing the key will display the following prompt tttttttttttttttttttt default SETPOINT x nnnnnnnn uuuuuu This prompt is displayed for each setpoint which has its PROMPT TEXT configured each prompt being accessed via and keys The tt field is the configured setpoint prompt text The value for nn depends on the setpoint s upper and lower limits decimal position The uu field is the c
250. t section where routines for performing various calibrations are located CHANGE ALL ENABLES System Prompts Enables amp Passwords Page 9 1 Prompt which provides ability to change all enable settings at once rather than one at a time When YES is selected the next prompt will be CHANGE ALL TO See CHANGE ALL TO CHANGE ALL TO System Prompts Enables amp Passwords Page 9 1 Prompt at which the choice changes all enable settings The choices are DISABLED ENABLED and TOGGLE The TOGGLE choice causes all sections that are enabled to be disabled and vice versa This prompt is accessed only by selecting YES for CHANGE ALL ENABLES CHANGE CHART Chart Prompts Page 6 1 Prompt which provides selection of NO or YES when first viewed NO is blinking To change the chart select YES Chart will stop and the instrument will display the next prompt When stopped in this manner it can only be started by selecting YES at the START NEW CHART prompt CHART CONFIGURATION Chart Prompts Page 6 2 Prompt section containing parameters which configure the chart in a general sense The parameters include chart size speed time periods time line colors etc The configuration of the trend recording is done in the RECORDERS section under CONFIGURATION CHART Key The CHART key is used to enter the Chart Prompts and to advance through the individual chart prompts CHART MESSAGES System Prompts Configuration Page 4 92 Prompt section co
251. t text nnnnnnnnnnyyyyyyyyyy AMM used see below The second line is a choice list with two items the n item being the programmable OFF STATE TEXT phrase associated with the Ol and the y item being the programmable ON STATE TEXT An Ol is configured when its prompt text as Configured in OPERATOR INPUTS section of CONFIGURATION is not blank It is visible when the following conditions apply WHEN DISPLAYED prompt in OPERATOR INPUTS configured to always or if configured to ENABLED in ENABLES amp PASSWORDS Edition 3 5 4 Section 5 Rev G Section 6 Chart Prompts From the Normal Display press the If the Chart Prompts are disabled when the CHART key is pressed CHART KEY DISABLED will appear in the lower display Refer to Section 9 Enables amp Passwords for instruc tions to enable Chart Prompts If the Chart Prompts are not disabled BUT the password is other than zero CHART PROMPTS PASSWORD will appear in the display when the CHART key is pressed If the correct password is entered CHANGE CHART will appear in the upper display If the incorrect password is entered INVALID PASSWORD will appear in the upper display If the Chart Prompts is not disabled AND the password is set to zero when the CHART key is pressed CHANGE CHART will appear in the upper display For the prompts associated with the CHART key the unit automatically goes into the modify mode unless the prompt is for SELECT CHART CONFIGURATION F
252. ted factor 0001 to 100000 TOTALIZER TYPE System Prompts Configuration Totalizers Page 4 56 Parameter that specifies one of four types of totalizing CONTINUOUS PRE LOAD COUNT TO PRESET or COUNT DOWN PRESET Appendix C C 13 Edition 3 Rev G TO ZERO BELOW VALUE System Prompts Configuration Inputs Page 4 10 One of the choices for CUTOFF TYPE which specifies that the resultant IV Input Value is set to zero whenever the input value is less than the CUTOFF VALUE Consequently negative values are set to zero The CUTOFF VALUE must be positive TO ZERO NEAR ZERO System Prompts Configuration Inputs Page 4 10 One of the choices for One method of input cutoff type when selected sets the input value to zero whenever the absolute value is less than the specified value thus allowing negative values but zeroing small positive or nega tive values The CUTOFF VALUE must be positive TREND DATA COLLECT Actuator Actuator that is controlled by the selected state at the TREND DATA COLLECT prompt found in the Chart Prompts section TREND DATA COLLECT Prompt Chart Prompts Page 6 14 Parameter that controls the TREND DATA COLLECT actuator This parameter is like a special Operator Input which is pre configured but located in the Chart Prompts as it causes no action directly but merely changes the state of the TREND DATA COLLECT actuator For some applications it may be desirable to control trend data collection with a
253. th Panel Protrusion Weight 12 7 inches wide x 12 7 inches high 322 58mm wide x 322 58mm high 5 25 inches 133 35 mm 2 5 inches 63 5mm 25 lbs maximum ENVIRONMENTAL AND OPERATING CONDITIONS Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Humidity Vibration Mounting Position Reference Conditions OTHER SPECIFICATIONS Clock Accuracy Battery Backup Simulated Variables DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS Type Protocol Network Control Bit Rate Parity Address GENERAL REFERENCE DATA Data Backup Warranty APPROVALS AND COMPLIANCE Safety Immunity Susceptibility Emissions Hazardous Locations ModBus is a trademark of MODICON Inc Edition 3 Rev 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F 40 to 65 C 40 to 149 F 10 to 90 RH non condensing 0 3 to 100 Hz 0 2g Up to 30 forward or backward tilt from vertical Up to 10 side tilt from vertical 25 C 2 C and 60 RH 5 RH 1 minute month typically 4 minutes month worst case 5 years minimum life 10 years typically Four function generators RS 232C RS 485 serial communications port Half duplex ModBus RTU Can be configured as either the master or a slave User configurable 1200 2400 4800 or 9600 bit per second Odd even or none User configurable 1 to 247 EEPROM for input board calibration data EEPROM for motherboard calibration data Battery backed SRAM for configuration data Two years UL Approved for USA UL 1092 UL 916 and QUXY File E67237 UL
254. the actuator goes inactive then active again PRELOAD System Prompts Configuration Totalizers Page 4 56 One of the choices for TOTALIZER TYPE which specifies that the total counts to 999 999 999 and then rolls over to zero The corresponding preset actuator is true whenever the total is equal to or greater than the TOTALIZER PRESET value The RESET ACTUATOR resets the total to the TOTALIZER PRESET value Print interval The time between each print cycle when the pen actuator cartridge assembly passes over the chart to record trend and other data The print interval is equal to the value of the chart rotation speed expressed in hours expressed in seconds For example with a chart speed of 12 hours the print interval is 12 seconds PRINT RANGE LIST Chart Prompts Chart Configuration Page 6 11 The choice for the parameter ACTION ON NEW CHART that prints a list of the scale range units and recorder tag for each Recorder configured If the Recorder is using two zones or does not use 100 of the printable chart span the designation NL for Non Linear will be included PRINT SCALES Chart Prompts Chart Configuration Page 6 11 The choice for the parameter ACTION ON NEW CHART that prints a set of scales for each Recorder configured PROCESS VARIABLES System Prompts Configuration Page 4 32 Prompts section that configures up to four Process Variables which can be used for alarming or to take advan tage of the 4 PVS Di
255. the to display DERIVED ACTUATOR DERIVED ACTUATOR Press the a change then to desired number then press the f Selections 1 to 24 Edition 3 4 82 Section 4 RevG 2 Press the to advance to the next parameter COPY INITIALIZE DAxx COPY INITIALIZE NO Press the change then to Selections NO YES desired choice then press the i Choose YES if the parameters to be programmed are the same as another DERIVED ACTUATOR already programmed If selection was NO proceed to step 3 If selection was YES D 3 R U A T ie R S DAxx COPY FROM DA 0 INITIALIZE XX Press the to change to the desired Derived Actuator to be copied from 0 FACTORY DEFAULT actuator to be copied from Section 4 4 83 Edition 3 Rev G 3 Press the to advance to the next parameter ITEM 1 Selections END OR AND NOT ANY ALARM ANY PROCESS ALARM A11 A12 A13 A14 A21 A22 A23 A24 A31 A32 A33 A34 A41 A42 M3 44 INSTRUMENT ALARM CHART FULL OPINP1 OPINP2 OPINP3 OPINP 4 OPINP5 OPINP6 OPINP7 OPINP8 OP INP9 OPINP 10 OP INP 11 OP INP 12 CHART CHANGED CHART ROTATION TREND DATA COLLECT ALT CHART SPEED DA1 DA2 DA3 DA4 DA5 DA6 DA7 DA8 DA9 DA10 DA11 DA12 DA13 DA14 DA15 DA16 DA17 DA18 DA19 DA20 DA21 DA22 DA23 DA24 PRESET 1 PRESET 2 PRESET 3 PRESET 4 TOTAL PO1 TOTAL PO2 TOTAL TOTAL PO4 TIME 1 1 TIME 2 TI
256. them MATCH SELECT Chart Prompts Chart Configuration Page 6 8 Parameters which specify whether time lines times and dates and chart tags should be in the same color as the scale just printed or always be a fixed color Appendix C C 7 Edition 3 Rev G MATCH SCALE COLOR Chart Prompts Chart Configuration Page 6 8 Achoice for MATCH SELECT prompts which specifies that the corresponding time line time or date and chart tag should be in the same color as the scale as the chart is being printed Minor time lines Minor time lines are printed as a series of dots with spacing greater than major time lines and extend from the inner chart ring to the outer chart ring Minor time lines are printed between major time lines and the number of minor time lines is one less than the number of MINOR TIME PERIODS specified in Chart Configuration MINOR TIME PERIODS Chart Prompts Chart Configuration Page 6 8 Parameter that specifies the number of periods or sections each major time period shall be divided into This also corresponds to one less than the number of minor time lines printed and indirectly the time between them MOMENTARY System Prompts Configuration Operator Inputs Page 4 83 One of two choices for ACTUATION STYLE where the state must be active only momentarily rather than continu ously For example for an Operator Input used to reset a totalizer MOMENTARY would cause the total to be reset when the ON YES 1 c
257. tion 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Configuration With CONFIGURATION in the display press the then the until OPERATOR INPUTS appears in the lower display line 1 Press the to display OPERATOR INPUT OPERATOR INPUT Press the m change then to 1 to 12 desired number then press the 2 Press the to advance to the next parameter COPY INITIALIZE D 3 R V 3 D A T U A T 0 R amp 0 P R A T 0 R Olxx COPY INITIALIZE NO Press change then to NO YES desired choice then press the Section 4 4 85 3 Rev G 02 Choose YES if the parameters to be programmed are the same as another OPERATOR INPUT already pro grammed If selection was NO proceed to siep 3 If selection was YES Olxx COPY FROM OI 0 INITIALIZE Operator Input to be copied from Press the to change to the desired 0 FACTORY DEFAULT actuator to be copied from 3 Press the to advance to the next parameter PROMPT TEXT Olxx PROMPT TEXT Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for instructions Selections Character Selection If TEXT not entered no other prompt in OPERATOR INPUTS will be seen Refer back to step 1 page 4 81 R D A T U A T 0 R S amp 0 P R A T 0 R Q A CUZ Edition 3 4 86 Section 4 Rev G 4 Press the to advance to the next parameter
258. u 11 4 C5 C14 D 3 Revised Pages 1 1 1 3 1 4 1 5 2 16 3 13 3 16 3 17 3 23 3 29 3 33 3 44 4 2 4 17 4 20 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 34 4 36 4 38 4 39 4 41 4 42 4 45 4 54 4 58 4 59 4 63 4 65 4 66 4 67 4 68 4 69 4 73 4 74 4 75 4 77 4 78 4 80 4 87 4 91 4 93 4 94 5 1 6 6 6 12 6 13 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 9 2 9 6 Added Pages 3 24 3 25 3 36 3 37 3 43 SEC 13 Edition 3 Rev G Description Edition 3 7 1 98 Revised Pages 9 2 thru 9 22 Added Pages SEC 14 Edition 3 2 Prefix amp Table of Contents RevG VersaChart Manual Prefix MANUAL ORGANIZATION This manual is organized in twelve major sections Section 1 Introduction and General Information Section 2 Installation and Wiring Section 3 The Basics of Recorder Operation Section 4 Configuration Section 5 Display Programming Section 6 Chart Prompts Section 7 Alarm Settings Section 8 Action Time Settings Section 9 Enables amp Passwords Section 10 Test Section 11 Calibration Section 12 Appendix Section 13 Controllers Section 14 Profilers All users should be familiar with the first three sections of this manual before beginning to operate the recorder Operators are then advised to cover the Display Programming Chart Prompts and Alarm Setting sections Configurators should be familiar with all information particually the details in the Configuration Programming section PARTLOW TECHNICAL AND APPLICA
259. urrent choice will be displayed and the current choice will blink If multiple choices are displayed the LEFT ARROW or SCROLL keys will move the selection to the left or right If all choices are not displayed at once due to multiple choice lines the UP ARROW key will step backward to the previous choice line or the DOWN ARROW key will step forward to the next choice line Pressing the ESC key will exit Modify and the original setting will be displayed no change being made to it Pressing the ENTER key will exit Modify and the new setting will be displayed and entered into memory Achoice line may offer 1 through 5 choices Pressing the Special key located directly below the desired choice will select and enter that choice into memory 3 4 4 COPY INITIALIZE A COPY INITIALIZE capability is available with some parameter sections If COPY is selected the unit automati cally goes into Modify on its associated value and uses its associated number as an index and copies data from one set of elements into the current set of elements If the associated number is set to zero the factory default values are stored into the selected set of elements INITIALIZE The COPY function applies to all parameter entries following it until the next non parameter entry 3 4 5 PASSWORDS Where PASSWORDS apply they are not displayed if the current value of the password is zero If PASSWORDS are not zero and the value is set to the correct password the unit aut
260. urs running through midnight Actuators Digital values considered to be 1 or 0 true or false active or inactive available as choice selections for various parameters used to cause some action to occur For example A23 is the designation for third alarm on PV2 Process Variable 2 When PV2 is in alarm A23 will be 1 true or active and if a relay has been configured to be activated by A23 the relay would be energized ALARM SETTINGS System Prompts Section 7 Prompt section containing parameters which specify the setpoint of each alarm configured within the Process Variables section of Configuration ALARMS ON ACTUATOR System Prompts Configuration Instrument Settings Page 4 74 Parameter that selects an actuator which controls whether process alarming is active When inactive all process alarms A11 through A44 are reset and ignored ALARM TYPE System Prompts Configuration Process Variables Page 4 36 Parameter that specifies the type of alarm PROCESS HIGH PROCESS LOW RATE RAISING etc ALT SPEED ACTUATOR Chart Prompts Chart Configuration Page 6 6 Parameter that specifies an actuator that when active switches the chart speed from the NORMAL SPEED to the ALTERNATE SPEED AT VALUE System Prompts Configuration Inputs Page 4 10 One of the choices for CUTOFF TYPE which specifies that the resultant IV Input Value is set to the CUTOFF VALUE whenever the input valve is less than the CUTOFF VALUE The CUT
261. vance to the next parameter REMOTE SETPOINT BIAS NOTE Bias is applied to the remote setpoint before it is used and to the output of the first controller in cascade mode before it is used as the setpoint of the second controller Bias is an offset added to the output Controller Output 1 Bias Controller 2 Setpoint Press the change then to desired number then press the Cx REMOTE SP BIAS 0 Selections 999999 decimal position 0 9 9999 decimal position 4 22 Press the to advance to the next parameter FEEDFORWARD SOURCE only if FEEDFORWARD was selected as CONTROL TYPE Cx FEEDFORWARD SOURCE NONE USED Selections NONE USED IV1 IV2 IV3 V4 IV5 IV6 IV7 V8 PV1 PV2 PV3 PV4 DV1 DV2 DV3 DV4 DV5 DV6 DV7 DV8 DV9 DV10 DV11 DV12 CV1 CV2 CV4 CV5 CV6 CV7 CV8 CV9 CV10 CV11 CV12 TOTAL1 TOTAL2 TOTAL3 TOTAL 4 SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 12 OUTPUT 22 OUTPUT 31 OUTPUT 32 OUTPUT 41 OUTPUT 42 SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4 Section 13 13 15 NOTE Whatever value is selected as the source of the setpoint the decimal position and the units type follow what was configured in Process Variables Press the B change then to desired choice then press ne f Edition 3 Rev G 23 Press the to advance to the next parameter FEEDFORWARD HIGH only if FEEDFORWARD was selected as CONTROL TYPE Cx FEEDFORWARD HIGH 100 Selections 999999 decima
262. ve the preset value and stops The corresponding actuator TOTAL 1 through TOTAL 4 is true whenever the total is equal to or greater than the TOTALIZER PRESET The RESET ACTUATOR resets the total to zero CURRENT OUTPUT RANGE System Prompts Configuration Current Outputs Page 4 70 Parameter that specifies the range of the current output 0 20mA or 4 20mA CURRENT OUTPUTS System Prompts Configuration Page 4 69 Prompt section containing parameters which configure the sources and ranges for the current 4 20mA type outputs CUSTOM CURVES System Prompts Configuration Page 4 15 Prompt section containing parameters which specify the characteristics of custom curves Each of 4 curves can have up to 20 point pairs The curve is applied by selecting a CUSTOM CURVE choice as a Derived Variable function The curves can be used to perform non linear engineering value translations or perform piece wise correction to a value CUTOFF TYPE System Prompts Configuration Inputs Page 4 10 Parameter that specifies the optional cutoff or lower boundary condition to be established and applied to an IV Input Value CUTOFF VALUE System Prompts Configuration Inputs Page 4 10 Parameter that specifies the value to be used in conjunction with CUTOFF TYPE CYCLIC System Prompts Configuration Operator Messages Page 4 88 One of the choices for DISPLAY MODE that specifies that the Operator Messages will appear cyclically In
263. vides the trend recording function on one of the four pens Each RECORDER is not inherently associated with any particular input process variable pen or color but rather is fully configurable to work with any of these RECORDERS System Prompts Configuration Page 4 43 Prompts section that configures recording method scales zones colors etc for each RECORDER RECORDING METHOD System Prompts Configuration Recorders Page 4 46 Parameter specifying one of five methods of trend recording INSTANTANEOUS VALUES CONNECT THE VALUES DRAG MIN TO MAX AVERAGE VALUES and CONNECT THE AVERAGES RELAY ACTUATOR System Prompts Configuration Relays Page 4 67 Parameter that selects an actuator which when true causes the specified relay 1 8 to be energized Edition 3 C 10 Appendix C Rev G RELAYS System Prompts Configuration Page 4 66 Prompts section that configures actuators and other parameters associated with relay and or solid state relay driver outputs RELAY x USAGE System Prompts Configuration Relays Page 4 66 Parameter that specifies the type of output the relay is to provide or how it is to be used STATE OR ON OFF TIME PROPORTIONING or PULSED OUTPUT RINGS AND TIME LINES See CHART TYPE USED RINGS LINES SCALES See CHART TYPE USED RINGS ONLY Chart Prompts Chart Configuration Page 6 2 Achoice for the parameter CHART TYPE which specifies that the charts only has preprinted rings This is w
264. with the Sequential Display active the arrow keys will cause no action While in Normal Display with the Continuous Display active the Up or Down Arrow keys will step backward or forward through items in the Display Sequence While in any prompt section the Left Arrow and Scroll keys will step backward and forward through the selections at that level The selections wrap around at the ends The Down Arrow key steps down or forward one level The Up Arrow key steps up or backward one level If the prompting is at the top or first level the Up Arrow key will return the unit to Normal Display The Arrow keys repeat when held down every half second after the first second The unit remembers the path taken through the System and Display prompts That is by returning to Normal Display by successive depressions of the Up Arrow key the operator can return to the same point by entering the corresponding prompts section and successive depressions of the Down Arrow key 3 8 5 RESET KEY RESET special key located on lower left While in a prompt section the Reset key returns the unit to Normal Display and resets the path pointers to the initial conditions 3 3 8 ESCAPE KEY ESC MODIFY KEY MOD ENTER KEY ENTER While a modifiable parameter description and its setting are displayed pressing the MOD key places the unit in Modify where the setting can be modified or changed Pressing the ESC key will exit Modify and the original value w
265. xt corresponding to the current state Edition 3 3 6 Section 3 Rev Whenever the display format is other than 1 VAL at a time the different types are not intermixed in any given display step consequently the second line may be blank SEQUENTIAL DISPLAY With Sequential Display active the instrument provides a sequential display of all input simulated derived and process values that have their Display Option set to IN SEQUENTIAL MODE or IN BOTH MODES The rate of sequencing is programmable from 1 to 8 seconds CONTINUOUS DISPLAY With Continuous Display active the instrument continuously displays a single step of the Display Sequence for all input simulated derived and process values that have their Display Option set to IN CONTINUOUS MODE or IN BOTH MODES The UP and DOWN keys will step backward or forward through the list 3 8 CHART DETAILS The CHART TYPE is user selectable from one of three choices 1 RINGS LINES SCALES preprinted Rings concentric rings Lines time lines Scales scale numbers 2 RINGS AND TIME LINES preprinted 3 RINGS ONLY preprinted The RECORDING METHOD choices user selectable per pen are as follows using a 24 hour rotation for ex ample with spokes recorded every 24 seconds 1 INSTANTANEOUS VALUES records the instantaneous value at 24 second intervals 2 CONNECT THE VALUES records the instantaneous value at 24 second intervals but includes dots between successive v
266. y press the until CONFIGURATION is seen in the lower display line If PASS WORD appears in the lower display line the correct password will need to be entered before access to Configu ration is allowed If CONFIGURATION is not displayed then Configuration has been disabled Refer to Section 9 Enables and Passwords for instructions to enable Configuration With CONFIGURATION in the display press the then the until INSTRUMENT SETTINGS appears in the lower display line 1 Press the to display INSTRUMENT TAG INSTRUMENT TAG RECORDER 1 Refer to Section 3 4 2 Changing Text page 3 3 for instructions S T R U M S G S 2 Press the to advance to the next parameters DISPLAY OPTION DISPLAY OPTION IN SEQUENTIAL MODE Selections NOT DISPLAYED Press the to change then to IN CONTINUOUS MODE IN SEQUENTIAL MODE desired choice then press the IN BOTH MODES Edition 3 4 74 Section 4 Rev G 3 Press the to advance to the next parameter INSTR ON ACTUATOR INSTR ON ACTUATOR ON CONTINUOUS Selections NONE OFF ON CONTINUOUS ANY ALARM ANY PROCESS ALARM 11 A12 A13 A14 A21 A22 A23 A24 A31 A32 A33 A34 A41 A42 M3 44 INSTRUMENT ALARM CHART FULL OPINP 1 OPINP2 OPINP3 OPINP 4 OPINP5 OPINP6 OPINP7 OPINP8 OPINP9 OPINP 10 OP INP 11 OPINP 12 CHART CHANGED CHART ROTATION TREND DATA COLLECT ALT CHART SPEED DA1 DA2 DA3 DA4 DA5 DA6 DA7 DA8 DA9 DA10
267. y not running Current Segment This is the current active segment which can be modified if the profile is not active When RUN is selected under PROFILE RUN HOLD the profiler will begin running from the current profile and the new current segment entered 8 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter RAMP TIME REMAINING Only modifiable if profile is presently not running 9 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter DWELL TIME REMAINING Only modifiable if profile is presently not running Ramp Dwell Time Remaining These parameters may be modified if the profile is not active When RUN is selected under PROFILE RUN HOLD the profiler will begin running from the current profile current segment using the new RAMP and or DWELL time If the profile is active and updating the ramp or dwell time the value displayed when first entering the menu will be the last value read 10 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter EVENT OUTPUTS Under each event number is the current state O or 1 Selections are 0 or 1 0 is not active and 1 is active Event Outputs Event Outputs can always be modified Event outputs represent the current active segment ramp or dwell 11 Press the SCROLL key to advance to the next parameter PROFILE STATUS ACTION only seen if profile has been aborted Displayed in AMM selections are ABORTED or CONTINUE Press the key directly below the choice to desired P

Partlow MRC9000 VersaChart circular chart recorder user manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents